Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf

281 excerpts.

Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 1 · Applies to: 450, 451

Manuals / Brands / SMART Manuals / Automobile / fortwo / Owner's manual / PDF SMART FORTWO OWNER'S MANUAL Table of Contents Contents Table of Contents General notes Important safety note Diagnostics connection Qualified specialist workshop Rescue card Copyright multifunction steering wheel Centre console

Overhead control panel

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 2 · Applies to: 450, 451

Control panel Useful information Important safety notes lamps Introduction Occupant safety Fastening Introduction Kneebag Head/thorax airbag Triggering children in the vehicle Child restraint system ISOFIX Children in the vehicle Top Tether passenger airbag On the front-passenger seat Suitable positions Pets in the vehicle Protection against theft Driving safety systems Important safety notes Distance warning function General notes Crosswind Assist Key Important safety notes Replacing Loss Important safety notes

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 3 · Applies to: 450, 451

Doors Automatic Emergency locking Luggage compartment Side windows Side windows Opening/closing Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof Correct driver's seat position Useful information Seats Important safety notes Folding down Switching on/off Steering wheel Seat heating problem Mirrors Exterior lighting Symmetrical dipped beam Automatic headlamp mode Adjusting the headlamp range Headlamp flasher Useful information Interior lighting Hazard warning lamps Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs Important safety notes replacing bulbs Front foglamp

Brake lamps

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 4 · Applies to: 450, 451

Windscreen wipers Interior lighting Intermittent wipe windscreen wipers Useful information Misting up Overview of climate control systems Recommendations Operating the climate control system Cooling with air dehumidifica tion Setting the air distribution Demisting the windscreen Demisting the windows Adjusting the air vents Air vents Important safety notes Setting Driving Correct usage Pulling away Introduction Colour display Running-in notes Useful information Manual transmission Gear lever Engaging reverse gear Automatic transmission Drive program display Changing gear Drive programs

automatic transmission

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 5 · Applies to: 450, 451

Gearshift paddles lever lock Refuelling Parking Parking Parking brake Fuel Driving tips Driving tips New brake pads/linings Aquaplaning Driving systems Cruise control Activating Cancelling cruise control Speed limiter Parking aid Reversing camera Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating Overview Fuel gauge Additional instruments Monochrome standard display Message memory Settings menu Setting Setting the temperature unit Monochrome display Colour display

Safety systems

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 6 · Applies to: 450, 451

Display message Display message Display message Display message Driving systems Tyres Display message Warning lamp Warning lamp Indicator lamp Warning lamp Warning and indicator lamps Warning lamp Warning lamp Warning lamp Loading guidelines Glove compartment Fitting/removing Centre console Ashtray Floormat Useful information Engine compartment cover Checking the oil level Service cover Checking service products Important safety notes Service Hiding Automatic car wash Care

High-pressure cleaner

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 7 · Applies to: 450, 451

Panorama roof Exterior lighting Display Carpets Useful information First-aid kit Where will I find Flat tyres Fire extinguisher TIREFIT kit Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Jump-starting Important safety notes Towing and tow-starting Fitting the towing eye Emergency engine starting Fuse box in the front area Electrical fuses Allocation Important safety notes Operation Checking Useful information Winter operation In winter Tyre pressure Snow chains tyre pressure Important safety notes

Warning message

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 8 · Applies to: 450, 451

Changing a wheel Fitting a wheel Changing a wheel Raising the vehicle Removing a wheel Lowering the vehicle Wheel and tyre combinations General notes Wheel and tyre combinations Technical data Useful information Information on technical data Two-way radio Vehicle electronics Vehicle identification plate Identification plates Engine number Service products and capacities Important safety notes Additives Overview Notes Vehicle data Washer fluid vehicle data Other ManualsLib Projects

>> Owner's Manual

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 9 · Applies to: 450, 451

smart fortwo Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Symbols

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 10 · Applies to: 450, 451

In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i These symbols indicate useful instruc- tions or further information that could be helpful to you. X This symbol designates an instruc- tion you must follow. X Several consecutive symbols indi- cate an instruction with several steps. (Y page) This symbol tells you where you can find further information on a topic. YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page. Dis‐ play This text indicates a message on the multifunction display. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Let the fun begin!

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 11 · Applies to: 450, 451

Before you first drive off, read this Own- er's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. This Owner's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand- drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. smart is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. smart therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may there- fore differ from that shown in the descrip- tions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. 4535847902 É4535847902ÄËÍ

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 12 · Applies to: 450, 451

Index ............................................ 4

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 13 · Applies to: 450, 451

Introduction ................................. 18 At a glance ................................... 25 Safety .......................................... 37 Opening and closing ....................... 63 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ...... 77 Lights and windscreen wipers ........... 85 Climate control ............................ 101 Driving and parking ...................... 113 On-board computer and displays ....... 147 Stowing and features ...................... 197 Maintenance and care .................... 205 Breakdown assistance .................... 219 Wheels and tyres ........................... 239 Technical data ............................. 257 Contents 3 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12 V socket

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 14 · Applies to: 450, 451

1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ....................... 170 Function/notes ......................... 59 Important safety notes ................ 59 Warning lamp ........................... 187 Activating/deactivating air- recirculation mode ........................ 111 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification .............. 106 Additives (engine oil) ................... 263 Adjusting the headlamp range ........... 88 Air conditioning General notes .......................... 102 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes ............... 111 Setting ................................... 111 Setting the centre air vents ........ 112 Setting the side air vents .......... 112 Air vents see Air vents Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Enabling and disabling the passenger airbag* ..................... 50 Head/thorax airbag .................... 45 Introduction ............................ 43 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ...................................... 39 Warning lamp .......................... 185 Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ............................... 44 Important safety guidelines ........ 43 Kneebag .................................. 44 Triggering .............................. 45 Alarm Anti-theft alarm system .............. 58 Priming/deactivating function .... 58 Switching off ........................... 59 Ambient lighting Setting the brightness .............. 160 Switching on/off ...................... 160 Animals see Pets in the vehicle Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system Function .................................. 58 Priming/deactivating ................ 58 Switching off the alarm .............. 59 Aquaplaning ................................ 138 Ashtray ....................................... 203 Assistance system see Driving systems Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic engine Start/Stop func- tion Display message ....................... 180 Automatic engine switch-off (auto- matic start/stop system) ................. 118 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 87 Automatic Start/Stop function Indicator lamp (green) .............. 195 Warning and indicator lamps (yellow) .................................. 195 Automatic start/stop system Activating/deactivating ............ 119 Automatic engine switch- off ......................................... 118 General information .................. 117 Introduction ............................ 117 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ........ 124 Changing gear ......................... 124 Display message (colour dis- play) ...................................... 181 Display message (monochrome display) ................................. 163 Drive program display .............. 123 Drive programs ........................ 125 Driving tips ........................... 124 Emergency running mode ............ 129 Gearshift paddles ..................... 127 4 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Kickdown ................................ 125

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 15 · Applies to: 450, 451

Malfunction (on-board computer with colour display) .................. 181 Malfunction (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 163 Manual shifting ....................... 125 Manually releasing the selector lever lock ............................... 129 Overview ................................ 122 Problem (fault) ........................ 129 Program selector button ............ 125 Pulling away ............................ 116 Selector lever ......................... 123 Starting the engine ................... 116 Transmission position display ... 123 Transmission positions ............. 124 Automatic transmission emergency running mode ............................... 129 B Battery (key) Important safety notes ................ 65 Replacing ................................ 65 Battery (vehicle) Charging ................................ 227 Display message ....................... 173 Important safety notes .............. 225 Jump starting .......................... 228 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 190 Belt see Seat belts Belt tensioner Activation ............................... 45 Blower see Climate control Bonnet (front) see Service cover Boot Installing the cover ................. 200 Installing/removing the cover .... 201 see Tailgate Brake EBD ........................................ 62 Brake fluid Display message ....................... 169 Notes ..................................... 264 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Changing bulbs ......................... 94 Display message (colour dis- play) ..................................... 180 Brake lights Display message (monochrome display) ................................. 162 Brakes ABS ......................................... 59 Brake fluid (notes) ................... 264 Driving tips ............................ 136 Important safety notes ............... 136 Parking brake .......................... 133 Warning lamp .......................... 185 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away/tow-starting Bulbs see Replacing bulbs C Calling up a fault see Display messages Capacities (technical data) ............ 260 Car see Vehicle Car key see Key Car wash see Care Car wash (care) ............................. 212 Care Automatic car wash ................... 212 Carpets .................................. 217 Display .................................. 216 Exhaust pipe ........................... 216 Exterior lighting ..................... 215 Gear or selector lever ............... 217 General notes .......................... 212 High-pressure cleaner .............. 213 Interior ................................. 216 Paint ..................................... 213 Panorama roof ......................... 214 Plastic trim ............................ 216 Index 5 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Reversing camera ..................... 215

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 16 · Applies to: 450, 451

Roof lining ............................. 217 Seat belt ................................ 217 Seat cover ............................... 217 Sensors .................................. 215 Steering wheel ......................... 217 Washing by hand ....................... 213 Wheels ................................... 214 Windows ................................. 214 Wiper blades ........................... 215 Central locking Locking/unlocking (key) ............. 65 Centre console .............................. 33 Changing bulbs Brake lamps ............................. 94 Dipped-beam headlamps ............. 93 Front foglamp ........................... 93 Main-beam headlamps ................ 93 Rear foglamp ............................ 94 Reversing lamps ........................ 94 Tail lamps ............................... 94 Turn signals (front) ................... 92 Turn signals (rear) .................... 94 Child seat Forward-facing restraint sys- tem ......................................... 52 ISOFIX .................................... 48 On the front-passenger seat ......... 51 Rearward-facing restraint sys- tem ......................................... 52 Recommendations ...................... 56 Suitable positions .................... 53 Top Tether ............................... 49 Children Restraint systems ...................... 47 Cigarette lighter ......................... 203 Cleaning see Care Climate control Air conditioning ..................... 103 Automatic air conditioning ........ 105 Controlling automatically .......... 107 Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion ....................................... 106 Demisting the windows .............. 109 Demisting the windscreen .......... 108 Heating .................................. 103 Notes on using the air-condi- tioning system ......................... 103 Notes on using the automatic climate control ........................ 105 Overview of systems .................. 102 Problem with the rear window heating .................................. 111 Setting the air distribution ....... 107 Setting the air vents ................. 111 Setting the airflow ................... 108 Setting the temperature ............. 107 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................. 111 Switching on/off ...................... 105 Switching the rear window heat- ing on/off ............................... 109 Clock Setting (dashboard clock) .......... 150 Cockpit Overview ................................. 26 Constant headlamp mode see Daytime driving lights Consumption statistics (colour display) ...................................... 154 Controlling speed see Cruise control Coolant Battery .................................. 210 Checking the level .................... 210 Drive system ........................... 210 General notes .......................... 264 Important safety notes ............... 210 Setting the temperature unit ...... 160 Temperature gauge ................... 156 Topping up ............................. 210 Warning lamp ........................... 191 Coolant (engine) Display message ....................... 175 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ..................................... 23 Cover (front) see Service cover Crosswind Assist ............................ 62 Cruise control Activating .............................. 139 Buttons .................................. 139 Calling up the speed last stored .. 140 6 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cancelling cruise control .......... 140

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 17 · Applies to: 450, 451

Deactivating ........................... 140 Display message (colour dis- play) ...................................... 177 Display message (monochrome display) ................................. 166 Driving systems ....................... 139 Function/notes ........................ 139 General notes .......................... 139 Important safety notes ............... 139 Increasing/decreasing the speed .................................... 140 Storing and maintaining cur- rent speed .............................. 139 Cup holder Centre console ........................ 202 Important safety notes .............. 202 Rear centre console .................. 203 Cup holder see Cup holder D Dashboard Additional instruments ............. 150 Dashboard see Cockpit Dashboard clock ........................... 150 Data see Technical data Daytime driving lights Function/notes .......................... 87 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity .............. 20 Diagnostics connection ................... 20 Digital speedometer Display .................................. 148 Setting the display ................... 159 Dipped-beam headlamps Changing bulbs ......................... 93 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................... 86 Switching on/off ....................... 88 Display Colour ................................... 153 Menu (on-board computer with colour display) ........................ 158 Monochrome ............................. 151 Display (cleaning instructions) ....... 216 Display message Calling up (message memory) ...... 156 Colour display ......................... 167 Driving systems ....................... 176 General notes (on-board com- puter with colour display) .......... 167 General notes (on-board com- puter with monochrome display) .. 162 Monochrome display .................. 162 Setting the language ................. 160 Display messages Engine ................................... 173 Hiding ................................... 167 Lights .................................... 180 Safety systems ......................... 168 Service display ........................ 211 Tyres ..................................... 178 Vehicle .................................. 180 Distance recorder Monochrome display .................. 152 Distance recorder see Trip meter Distance warning function Function/notes ......................... 60 Warning lamp (red) ................... 189 Warning lamp (yellow) ............... 188 Door Automatic locking (switch) .......... 69 Central locking/unlocking (key) ... 65 Control panel ........................... 35 Display message ....................... 180 Emergency locking ..................... 70 Emergency unlocking .................. 70 Important safety notes ................ 68 Opening (from the inside) ........... 68 Warning lamp .......................... 194 Drive program Display .................................. 123 Drive programs Automatic transmission ............. 125 Driver's door see Door Driver's seat see Seats Driving abroad smart service .......................... 212 Index 7 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Symmetrical dipped beam ............ 86

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 18 · Applies to: 450, 451

Driving on flooded roads ................ 138 Driving safety system EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ........................... 62 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 59 Distance warning function .......... 60 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ...................................... 61 ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ........................................ 61 Important safety guidelines ........ 59 Overview ................................. 59 Driving system Parking aid ............................ 142 Speed limiter .......................... 141 Driving systems Cruise control ......................... 139 Display message ....................... 176 Lane Keeping Assist ................. 145 Reversing camera ..................... 143 Driving tips Aquaplaning ............................ 138 Automatic transmission ............. 124 Brakes ................................... 136 Downhill gradient .................... 136 Driving abroad ......................... 86 Driving in winter ..................... 138 Driving on flooded roads ........... 138 Driving on wet roads ................. 138 Fuel ...................................... 134 General .................................. 134 Icy road surfaces ...................... 138 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ............................ 137 New brake pads/linings ............. 137 Running-in tips ....................... 114 Snow chains ............................ 243 Subjecting brakes to a load ........ 137 Symmetrical dipped beam ............ 86 Wet road surface ....................... 137 E EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) Display message ....................... 169 Function/notes ......................... 62 Indicator lamp ........................ 186 eco score Display (on-board computer with colour display) ................. 155 Display (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 151 Function/notes ........................ 134 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ........... 20 Electronic Brake-force Distribu- tion see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Electronic Traction System see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency release Driver's door ............................ 70 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ................................... 70 Engine Automatic start/stop system ........ 117 Display message ....................... 173 Engine number ......................... 260 Jump-starting ......................... 228 Running irregularly ................. 120 Starting problems .................... 120 Starting the engine with the key .. 116 Stopping ................................ 133 Tow-starting (vehicle) .............. 232 Warning lamp (engine diagnos- tics) ...................................... 190 Engine compartment cover .............. 206 Engine electronics Notes ..................................... 258 Problem (fault) ........................ 120 Engine oil Additives ............................... 263 Checking the oil level ............... 207 Display message ....................... 174 Filling capacity ...................... 263 Notes about oil grades .............. 263 Notes on oil level/consumption ... 206 Topping up ............................. 207 Viscosity ............................... 264 Warning lamp ........................... 191 8 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Engine oil additives

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 19 · Applies to: 450, 451

see Additives (engine oil) Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehi- cle ......................................... 18 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Characteristics ........................ 62 Crosswind Assist ....................... 62 Display message ....................... 171 ETS ......................................... 61 Function/notes .......................... 61 General notes ............................ 61 Important safety guidelines ........ 61 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 187 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 61 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- tions) ......................................... 216 Exterior lighting Cleaning ................................ 215 Settings options ........................ 87 Exterior mirrors Adjusting (electrically) ............. 84 Adjusting (manually) .................. 84 Out of position (troubleshoot- ing) ........................................ 84 F Fault message see Display messages Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ......................... 221 First-aid kit ............................... 220 Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ........................ 251 Lowering the vehicle ................ 251 Preparing the vehicle ............... 248 Raising the vehicle .................. 249 Removing a wheel ..................... 250 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................... 248 Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle ............... 221 TIREFIT kit ............................. 222 Floormat ..................................... 204 Foglamps Switching on/off ....................... 88 Frequencies Mobile phone .......................... 258 Two-way radio ......................... 258 Front cover see Service cover Front foglamps Changing bulbs ......................... 93 Frontal area cover see Service cover Fuel Additives ............................... 262 Consumption information .......... 262 Consumption statistics ............. 154 Displaying the current con- sumption (colour display) .......... 156 Displaying the current con- sumption (monochrome display) ... 151 Driving tips ........................... 134 E10 ........................................ 261 Fuel gauge .............................. 149 Grade (petrol) ......................... 261 Important safety notes ............... 261 Problem (malfunction) ............... 132 Refuelling .............................. 130 Tank content/reserve fuel .......... 261 Fuel consumption Displaying (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 152 Resetting data (on-board com- puter with monochrome display) .. 152 Fuel filler flap Opening ................................. 131 Fuel level Gauge .................................... 149 Fuel reserve see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ................................. 261 Problem (malfunction) ............... 132 Fuses Allocation .............................. 235 Before changing ...................... 233 Dashboard fuse box ................... 234 Fuse box in the front area .......... 233 Important safety notes .............. 233 Index 9 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Gear or selector lever (cleaning

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 20 · Applies to: 450, 451

G Gear or selector lever (cleaning instructions) ............................... 217 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 18 Glove compartment ........................ 199 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hands-free system see Mobile phone Hazard warning lamps ..................... 90 Head/thorax airbag ........................ 45 Headlamp flasher ........................... 89 Headlamps Misting up ............................... 90 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners ................. 213 Hill start assist ............................ 117 I Ice warning Display message (colour dis- play) ...................................... 173 Display message (monochrome display) ................................. 167 Warning lamp (colour display) .... 149 Warning lamp (monochrome dis- play) ..................................... 149 Ignition key see Key Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser ................................. 58 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ...................... 185 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .................................. 191 Engine diagnostics ................... 190 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Overview (colour display) ........... 29 Overview (monochrome display) .... 27 Warning and indicator lamps (colour display) ........................ 30 Warning and indicator lamps (monochrome display) ................. 28 Instrument cluster lighting Notes ..................................... 148 Setting .................................. 158 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Interior lighting ........................... 90 Automatic control system ............ 90 Changing bulbs ......................... 95 Overview ................................. 90 Setting the ambient lighting ...... 160 Intermittent wipe .......................... 96 ISOFIX child seat securing system ..... 48 J Jack Using .................................... 249 Jump start (engine) see Jump starting (engine) Jump starting (engine) ................... 228 K Key Changing the battery .................. 65 Door central locking/unlocking .... 65 Important safety notes ................ 64 Loss ........................................ 67 Positions (ignition lock) ........... 115 Problem (malfunction) ................ 67 Starting the engine ................... 116 Key positions (ignition lock) .......... 115 Kickdown Driving tips ............................ 125 Manual gearshifting ................. 128 Kneebag ....................................... 44 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ............ 146 Function/information ............... 145 Warning lamp (colour display) ..... 176 10 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning lamp (monochrome dis-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 21 · Applies to: 450, 451

play) ...................................... 165 Lane recognition system (auto- matic) see Lane Keeping Assist Language (on-board computer) ......... 160 Licence plate lighting Changing ................................. 94 Light sensor (display message) ........ 183 Lighting see Lights Lights Automatic headlamp mode ............ 87 Dipped-beam headlamps ............. 88 Display message ....................... 180 Driving abroad ......................... 86 Foglamps ................................. 88 Hazard warning lamps ................. 90 Headlamp flasher ....................... 89 Headlamp range ......................... 88 Light switch ............................. 87 Main-beam headlamps ................ 89 Rear foglamp ............................ 88 Setting the ambient lighting ...... 160 Side lamps ............................... 88 Turn signals ............................. 89 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs Limiter Buttons ................................... 141 Calling up the last speed stored .. 142 Cancelling .............................. 142 Deactivating ........................... 142 Display message (colour dis- play) ...................................... 176 Display message (monochrome display) ................................. 165 Exceeding the stored speed ........ 142 General notes .......................... 141 Increasing/decreasing the speed ..................................... 142 Storing the speed ..................... 141 Limiting the speed see Speed limiter Loading guidelines ....................... 198 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ................................ 69 Emergency locking ..................... 70 From inside (central locking button) .................................... 69 Locking centrally see Central locking Loudspeaker see Subwoofer Lubricant additives see Additives (engine oil) M M+S tyres (winter tyres) ................. 242 Main-beam headlamps Changing bulbs ......................... 93 Switching on/off ....................... 89 Manual transmission Display message (colour dis- play) ...................................... 181 Display message (monochrome display) ................................. 162 Engaging reverse gear ............... 122 Gear lever ............................... 121 Malfunction (on-board computer with colour display) ................. 183 Malfunction (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 164 Pulling away ............................ 116 Shift recommendation ............... 122 Shifting to neutral ................... 121 Starting the engine ................... 116 Manually releasing the selector lever lock (automatic transmission) . 129 Message memory (colour display) ...... 156 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror Mobile phone Frequencies ............................ 258 Installation ............................ 258 Transmission output (maximum) .. 258 Model series see Vehicle identification plate Index 11 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Multi-functional seat

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 22 · Applies to: 450, 451

see Seats Multifunction steering wheel Overview .................................. 31 N Notes on running in a new vehicle .... 114 O Occupant safety Children in the vehicle .............. 46 Important safety notes ................ 38 Pets in the vehicle .................... 58 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Display submenu ...................... 158 Displaying a service message ..... 211 Important safety notes ............... 148 Menu overview (colour display) ... 154 Menu overview (monochrome display) ................................. 152 Message memory ....................... 156 Operating (colour display) ......... 153 Operating (monochrome display) . 150 Selecting the language .............. 160 Service menu ........................... 156 Settings menu .......................... 157 On-board computer Messages menu ......................... 156 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ..................... 19 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ........... 20 Important safety note ................. 19 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display Ice warning (colour display) ....... 149 Ice warning (monochrome dis- play) ..................................... 149 Notes ..................................... 149 Setting the units ...................... 160 Overhead control panel ................... 34 Overrevving range ......................... 150 P Paint code ................................... 259 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .... 213 Panorama roof Cleaning ................................ 214 Panoramic roof Operating the roller sunblind ...... 75 Park brake see Parking brake Parking ...................................... 132 Important safety notes ............... 132 Parking brake .......................... 133 Reversing camera ..................... 143 Switching off the engine ............ 133 Parking brake Display message ....................... 168 Notes/function ........................ 133 Warning lamp .......................... 185 PASSENGER AIR BAG Disabling/activating ................. 50 Indicator lamps ........................ 39 Passenger airbag Enabling and disabling ............. 50 Problem (malfunction)* ............... 53 Passenger seat Folding down ............................ 80 Petrol ......................................... 261 Pets in the vehicle ......................... 58 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- tions) ......................................... 216 Power windows see Side windows Program selector button ................. 125 Protection against theft Anti-theft alarm system .............. 58 Immobiliser ............................. 58 Protection of the environment General notes ............................ 18 Pulling away Automatic transmission ............. 116 General notes .......................... 116 Manual transmission ................. 116 Q QR code Rescue card .............................. 22 12 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Qualified specialist workshop .......... 21

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 23 · Applies to: 450, 451

R Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ........... 20 Rain/light sensor (display message) . 183 Rear foglamp Changing bulbs ......................... 94 Switching on/off ....................... 88 Rear lamps Changing bulbs ......................... 94 Rear parking aid Activating/deactivating ............ 143 Function/notes ........................ 142 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ......................... 111 Switching on/off ...................... 109 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade ........... 97 Switching on/off ....................... 96 Rear-view mirror Dipping (manual) ....................... 84 Recycling see Protection of the environment Refuelling Fuel gauge .............................. 149 Important safety notes ............... 130 Refuelling process ................... 130 see Fuel Replacing bulbs Important safety notes ................ 91 Overview of bulb types ................ 91 Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) ...................... 92 Replacing the bulb Interior lighting ...................... 95 Turn signals ............................. 93 Rescue card .................................. 22 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ....................... 175 Restraint system Display message ....................... 168 Introduction ............................ 38 Warning lamp .......................... 185 Warning lamp (function) .............. 38 Rev counter ................................. 150 Reverse gear Engaging (manual transmission) .. 122 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ............... 215 Function/notes ........................ 143 Switching on/off ...................... 144 Reversing feature Side windows ............................ 72 Reversing lamp Changing bulbs ......................... 94 Roller sunblind of the panorama roof Operating ................................ 75 Roof see Panoramic roof Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ............................... 217 S Safety Child restraint systems .............. 47 Children in the vehicle .............. 46 see Operating safety Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat Folding passenger seat down ........ 80 Seat belt Correct usage ........................... 41 Seat belts Cleaning ................................ 217 Fastening ................................ 42 Important safety guidelines ........ 40 Introduction ............................ 40 Releasing ................................ 42 Warning lamp .......................... 184 Warning lamp (function) .............. 42 Seats Adjusting (manually) .................. 80 Cleaning the cover .................... 217 Correct driver's seat position ...... 78 Important safety notes ................ 79 Seat heating problem ................. 83 Switching seat heating on/off ...... 81 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 215 Index 13 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Service Centre

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 24 · Applies to: 450, 451

see Qualified specialist workshop Service cover .............................. 208 Service display Calling up (on-board computer with colour display) ................. 156 Calling up (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 152 Hiding a service message ........... 211 Notes ..................................... 211 Resetting ................................ 211 Service message ....................... 211 Showing a service message ......... 211 Special service requirements ..... 212 Service products Brake fluid ............................. 264 Coolant (engine) ...................... 264 Engine oil .............................. 263 Fuel ...................................... 261 Important safety notes .............. 260 Washer fluid ........................... 265 Setting a speed see Cruise control Setting the air distribution ........... 107 Setting the airflow ....................... 108 Shifting to neutral (manual trans- mission) ..................................... 121 Side lamps Switching on/off ....................... 88 Side windows Important safety notes ................ 72 Opening/closing ....................... 73 Problem (malfunction) ................ 75 Resetting ................................. 73 smart Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Snow chains ................................. 243 Sockets Centre console ........................ 204 General notes .......................... 204 Speakers see Subwoofer Specialist workshop ....................... 21 Speed limiter Activating .............................. 141 Important safety notes ............... 141 Setting limit speed .................. 141 Speedometer Digital .................................. 148 In the Instrument cluster ........... 148 see Instrument cluster SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem) see Restraint system Start/stop function see Automatic start/stop system Starting (engine) .......................... 115 Starting the engine see Starting (engine) Steering Display message (colour dis- play) ..................................... 180 Warning lamps ......................... 194 Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) .................. 83 Button overview ......................... 31 Cleaning ................................ 217 Gearshift paddles ..................... 127 Important safety notes ................ 83 Stowage areas ............................... 198 Stowage compartment Door stowage compartment .......... 199 Stowage compartment in the tailgate ................................. 199 Stowage compartment in the tail- gate ........................................... 199 Stowage compartments Centre console ......................... 199 Cup holder .............................. 202 Glove compartment ................... 199 Important safety information ...... 198 Submenu Ambient lighting ..................... 160 Subwoofer Fitting/removing ..................... 201 Summer tyres In winter ................................ 242 Sun visor .................................... 203 T Tailgate Important safety notes ................ 71 Opening dimensions ................. 265 Opening/closing ........................ 71 14 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning lamp ..........................

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 25 · Applies to: 450, 451

194 Tank see Fuel tank Technical data Capacities ............................. 260 Information ............................ 258 Tyres/wheels ........................... 252 Vehicle data ........................... 265 Temperature Coolant .................................. 156 Outside temperature ................. 149 Setting (climate control) ........... 107 Setting the display units ........... 160 Time Setting (on-board computer with colour display) .................. 157 Setting (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 152 Setting the time format (on- board computer with colour dis- play) ...................................... 158 TIREFIT kit ................................. 222 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .................................... 49 Total distance recorder Colour display ......................... 154 Monochrome display .................. 151 Setting the display unit ............ 159 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ......... 232 Important safety notes .............. 230 Towing Important safety notes .............. 230 With the rear axle raised ........... 232 Towing away Fitting the towing eye ............... 231 Removing the towing eye ............ 232 With both axles on the ground ..... 232 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transmission position display ........ 123 Transporting the vehicle ............... 232 Trip computer (colour display) ........ 154 Trip meter Colour display ......................... 154 Displaying (on-board computer with colour display) ................. 154 Displaying (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 152 Resetting (on-board computer with colour display) ................. 154 Resetting (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 152 Setting the display unit ............ 159 Trip meter see Trip meter Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................ 92 Changing bulbs (rear) ................ 94 Replacing the bulb .................... 93 Switching on/off ....................... 89 Turn signals see Turn signals Two-way radio Frequencies ............................ 258 Installation ............................ 258 Transmission output (maximum) .. 258 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Display message ....................... 178 Important safety notes .............. 245 Not reached (TIREFIT) ............... 223 Reached (TIREFIT) .................... 223 Recommended .......................... 243 Tyre pressure monitor Display message (monochrome display) ................................. 165 Function/notes ........................ 245 General notes .......................... 245 Important safety notes .............. 245 Restarting (on-board computer with colour display) ................. 246 Restarting (on-board computer with monochrome display) .......... 246 Warning lamp .......................... 192 Warning message ...................... 246 Tyres Changing a wheel ..................... 247 Checking ................................ 241 Direction of rotation ................ 248 Display message ....................... 178 General notes .......................... 252 Index 15 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Important safety notes ..............

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 26 · Applies to: 450, 451

240 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............ 242 Replacing ............................... 247 Service life ............................ 241 Snow chains ............................ 243 Storing .................................. 248 Summer tyres in winter ............. 242 Tyre size (data) ....................... 252 Tyre tread .............................. 241 Wheel and tyre combinations ...... 253 see Flat tyre U Unlocking Emergency unlocking .................. 70 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ...................... 69 V Vehicle Correct use .............................. 21 Data acquisition ....................... 22 Electronic malfunction (display message) ................................ 183 Electronic malfunction (warn- ing lamp) ................................ 194 Electronics ............................. 258 Equipment ................................ 19 Implied warranty ....................... 22 Leaving parked up .................... 134 Locking (in an emergency) ........... 70 Locking (key) ............................ 65 Lowering ................................ 251 Pulling away ............................ 116 Raising ................................. 249 Registration ............................ 21 Securing from rolling away ........ 248 Tow-starting ........................... 230 Towing away ............................ 230 Transporting .......................... 232 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........ 70 Unlocking (key) ......................... 65 Vehicle data ........................... 265 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data ................................ 265 Vehicle dimensions ...................... 265 Vehicle emergency locking .............. 70 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .......... 259 Vehicle key see Key Vehicle tool kit ........................... 221 Ventilation see Climate control VIN ............................................ 259 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ........................................ 187 Airbag ................................... 185 Automatic Start/Stop function (green) ................................... 195 Automatic Start/Stop function (yellow) .................................. 195 Battery .................................. 190 Brakes ................................... 185 Distance warning function (red) .. 189 Distance warning function (yel- low) ....................................... 188 Door ...................................... 194 EBD ....................................... 186 Electronics ............................. 194 ESP® ...................................... 187 Lane Keeping Assist (colour display) ................................. 176 Lane Keeping Assist (mono- chrome display) ....................... 165 Oil pressure ............................ 191 Overview (colour display) ........... 30 Overview (monochrome display) .... 28 Parking brake .......................... 185 PASSENGER AIR BAG .................... 39 Seat belt ................................ 184 Steering ................................. 194 Tyre pressure monitor ............... 192 Warning triangle .......................... 220 Wheel and tyre combinations see Tyres Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 251 Wheels Changing a wheel ..................... 247 Changing/replacing ................. 247 16 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Checking ................................ 241

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 27 · Applies to: 450, 451

Cleaning ................................ 214 Fitting a new wheel .................. 251 Fitting a wheel ........................ 248 General notes .......................... 252 Important safety notes .............. 240 Removing a wheel ..................... 250 Snow chains ............................ 243 Storing .................................. 248 Tightening torque .................... 251 Wheel size/tyre size ................. 252 Windows Cleaning ................................ 214 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ............................... 108 Windscreen see Windscreen Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Important safety notes .............. 265 Topping up ............................. 210 Windscreen wipers Intermittent wipe ...................... 96 Problem (malfunction) ................ 99 Rear window wiper ..................... 96 Replacing the wiper blades ......... 96 Switching on/off ....................... 95 Winter driving General notes .......................... 242 Winter operation Slippery road surfaces .............. 138 Snow chains ............................ 243 Winter tyres M+S tyres ............................... 242 Wiper blades Cleaning ................................ 215 Important safety notes ................ 96 Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 97 Replacing (windscreen) .............. 97 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Index 17 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Protection of the environment

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 28 · Applies to: 450, 451

General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of com- prehensive environmental protection. The objective is to use the natural resour- ces which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environ- mentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Rthe operating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con- tribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehi- cle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traf- fic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con- sumption. Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: smart will take back your old vehicle to dispose of it in an environmentally- responsible manner in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants available. In these plants you can return your vehicle free of charge. This makes a valuable contribution to the recycling process and the conserva- tion of resources. For further information on recycling old vehicles, recovery and the terms of the pol- icy, visit the smart homepage. Genuine smart parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard 18

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rinstrument cluster

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 29 · Applies to: 450, 451

Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a quali- fied specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by smart. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine smart parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been spe- cifically approved for your vehicle. smart tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been spe- cifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, smart is unable to assess other parts. smart there- fore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in smart vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or inde- pendently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only offi- cially approved for installation or modi- fication if they comply with legal require- ments. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine smart parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non- approved parts may invalidate the vehi- cle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 259) when ordering genuine smart parts. Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Coun- try-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documen- tation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a smart Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunc- tions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/main- tenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Introduction. 19 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 30 · Applies to: 450, 451

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and elec- tronic components carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- tronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed for. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon continuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the infor- mation systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the essential requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. For further information enquire at any smart centre. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only inten- ded for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist work- shop. 20

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 31 · Applies to: 450, 451

If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- tics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equip- ment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitor- ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and quali- fications to correctly carry out any neces- sary work on your vehicle. This particu- larly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and con- versions Rwork on electronic components smart recommends that you use a smart centre. Vehicle registration smart may ask its smart centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. smart can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the fol- lowing cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a smart centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a smart centre. Inform smart as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a smart centre, for exam- ple. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dan- gers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe technical data in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Introduction. 21 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Implied warranty

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 32 · Applies to: 450, 451

! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehi- cle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that ari- ses from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not cov- ered either by the smart implied war- ranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- ranty. QR codes for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pil- lar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehi- cle. The current rescue card contains, in a compact form, the most important informa- tion about your vehicle, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/ public/content/asportal/en/ communication/informationen_fuer/ QRCode.html. Data stored in the vehicle A large number of your vehicle's electronic components can store data. The data memory temporarily or perma- nently stores technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults The technical information generally docu- ments the condition of a component, mod- ule, system or the environment. These include, for example: RThe operating status of system compo- nents, e.g. fluid levels RStatus messages concerning the vehicle and its individual components, e.g. num- ber of wheel revolutions/speed, decel- eration in movement, lateral accelera- tion, accelerator pedal position RMalfunctions and defects in key system components, including, for instance, lights, brakes. RVehicle reactions and operating condi- tions in special driving situations, including, for instance, deployment of an airbag, use of stability control sys- tems. REnvironmental conditions, including, for instance, the outside temperature. This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in the detection and elimination of faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehi- cle's movements. If you have the vehicle serviced, this tech- nical information can be read out from the event and fault data memory. Services include, for example, informa- tion on: Rrepair work Rservice work Rwarranty claims Rquality assurance The readout is handled by service network staff (including the manufacturer) with the help of special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more detailed information, if required. After the fault has been rectified, the information is cleared in the fault memory or is sequentially overwritten. 22

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

During vehicle operation, certain situa-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 33 · Applies to: 450, 451

tions may arise in which this technical data - in conjunction with other informa- tion and, if applicable, after consultation with an approved assessor - may be linked to an individual person. Examples of this include: Raccident reports Rvehicle damage Revidence Copyright information General notes You can find information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource

Introduction. 23 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 34 · Applies to: 450, 451

24 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cockpit ........................................... 26

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 35 · Applies to: 450, 451

Instrument cluster with monochrome display ........................................... 27 Instrument cluster with colour dis- play ............................................... 29 Multifunction steering wheel .............. 31 Centre console .................................. 33 Overhead control panel ...................... 34 Door control panel ............................. 35 25

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cockpit

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 36 · Applies to: 450, 451

Function Page : Additional instruments on the dashboard 150 ; Instrument cluster 29 = Horn ? Multifunction lever On-board computer 150 Windscreen wipers com- bination switch 95 A Switches the automatic locking feature on/off 69 Switches the hazard warn- ing lamps on/off 90 B Overhead control panel 34 C smart Audio-System/ smart Media-System (see the separate operating instructions) D Climate control system control panel 102 Function Page E Ignition lock 115 F Adjusts the steering wheel 83 G Control panel for: è Turning the auto- matic start/stop system on/off 119 Turning Lane Keeping Assist on/off 145 Turning the forward col- lision warning on/off 60 Turning the parking aid on/off 142 Headlamp range adjust- ment 88 H Lights combination switch 87 I Gearshift paddles 127 26 Cockpit

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Instrument cluster with monochrome display

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 37 · Applies to: 450, 451

Displays i Instrument cluster with speedometer Function Page : Speedometer 148 ; Monochrome display 151 = Warning and indicator lamps 28 Instrument cluster with monochrome display 27

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning and indicator lamps

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 38 · Applies to: 450, 451

Function Page : ^ Distance warning function 188 ; · Distance warning signal 189 = T Side lamps 88 ? ç Automatic start/stop function Conditions for the auto- matic engine switch-off not met 117 Malfunction 195 A ? Coolant temperature 191 B 5 Oil pressure 191 C í Battery 190 D ! Turn signal, right 89 E D Power steering 194 F ; Engine diagnostics 190 G J Brakes 185 H ÷ esp® 187 Function Page I \ Doors or the tailgate 194 Vehicle electronics 194 J R Rear foglamp 88 K L Dipped-beam head- lamps 88 L K Main-beam head- lamps 89 M N Foglamps 88 N

Turn signal, left

89 O ü Seat belts 184 P 6 Restraint system 185 Q ! abs 187 R h Tyre pressure moni- tor 192 S è Automatic start/stop function Automatic start/stop sys- tem 118 28 Instrument cluster with monochrome display

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Instrument cluster with colour display

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 39 · Applies to: 450, 451

Displays i Instrument cluster with speedometer Function Page : Speedometer 148 ; Colour display 153 = Warning and indicator lamps 30 Instrument cluster with colour display 29

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning and indicator lamps

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 40 · Applies to: 450, 451

Function Page : ç Automatic start/stop function Conditions for the auto- matic engine switch-off not met 117 Malfunction 195 ; è Automatic start/stop function Automatic start/stop sys- tem 118 = ! abs 187 ? ÷ esp® 187 A í Battery 190 B h Tyre pressure moni- tor 192 C 5 Oil pressure 191 D D Power steering 194 E ; Engine diagnostics 190 F ? Coolant temperature 191 Function Page G ! Turn signal, right 89 H

Turn signal, left

89 I J Brakes 185 J R Rear foglamp 88 K N Foglamps 88 L K Main-beam head- lamps 89 M L Dipped-beam head- lamps 88 N 6 Restraint system 38 O T Side lamps 88 P · Distance warning signal 189 Q ü Seat belts 184 R \ Doors or the tailgate 194 Vehicle electronics 194 30 Instrument cluster with colour display

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Multifunction steering wheel

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 41 · Applies to: 450, 451

Function Page : Colour display in instru- ment cluster 153 Monochrome display in instrument cluster 151 ; smart Audio-System or smart Media-System dis- play (see the separate operating instructions) = W X Changes the volume of the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System (see the separate operating instructions) Only with an instrument cluster with colour dis- play: ? Switches voice- operated control of the smart Audio-System on/off and accepts/ends a call (see the separate operating instructions) Function Page ? Cruise control and lim- iter button: ® Increases or stores the current speed − Decreases current speed • Cruise control 139 • Limiter A Cruise control and lim- iter button: ° Calls up the last speed stored • Cruise control 139 • Limiter B Cruise control and lim- iter button: ± Interrupts cruise control or limiter • Cruise control 139 • Limiter Multifunction steering wheel 31

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 42 · Applies to: 450, 451

Page C Cruise control and lim- iter switch: V Activates cruise control ^ Deactivates cruise control or limiter È Activates limiter • Cruise control 139 • Limiter Function Page D Only with an instrument cluster with colour dis- play: 9 : Scrolls through a menu or list 153 a To confirm the selection 153 Changes to the "Reset val- ues" function in certain menus 153 Hides display messages 167 i Voice-operated control as well as con- trol of the telephone and volume using the steering wheel buttons in the control panel on the right = only function with the smart Media-System. If you use a smart Audio-System or an audio device from another manufacturer, the functions may be restricted or not available at all. 32 Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Centre console

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 43 · Applies to: 450, 451

i Vehicles with automatic transmission Function Page : Cup holders 202 ; Transmission position display 124 = Sets the driving program (program selector button) 125 ? Drawer 199 A Coin holder Function Page B Selector lever 123 C Parking brake 133 D Cigarette lighter 203 Power socket 204 E AUX/USB port and SD mem- ory card (only with smart Media-System) F Cup holders 203 Centre console 33

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Overhead control panel

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 44 · Applies to: 450, 451

Function Page : Depending on the position of the switch: Interior lighting switched on 90 Automatic interior light- ing control on 90 Interior lighting switched off 90 Function Page ; PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF/ON indicator lamps 39 = Rear-view mirror 84 34 Overhead control panel

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Door control panel

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 45 · Applies to: 450, 451

Function Page : Opens the door 68 ; Adjusts the exterior mir- rors electrically 84 Function Page = W Opens/closes the side windows 72 Door control panel 35

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 46 · Applies to: 450, 451

36 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ............................ 38

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 47 · Applies to: 450, 451

Occupant safety ................................ 38 Children in the vehicle ...................... 46 Pets in the vehicle ............................ 58 Protection against theft ..................... 58 Driving safety systems ....................... 59 37

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 48 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an acci- dent. The restraint system includes the: RSeat belt system RAirbags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing system The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only offer protection if all vehicle occupants always: Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened (Y page 41) Rhave the seat adjusted properly (Y page 79) As the driver, you must also make sure that the steering wheel is also adjusted prop- erly. Observe the information on the cor- rect driver's seat position (Y page 78). In addition, you must make sure that the airbags can inflate properly if they are deployed (Y page 43). An airbag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. The airbag, as an additional safety device, increases protection for vehicle occupants in applicable accident situations. The airbags are not deployed, for example, in the event of an accident in which sufficient protection is offered by the seat belt. In addition, only those air- bags, which in the applicable accident situations offer additional protection, are deployed in the event of an accident. However, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on how the restraint system operates can be found under "Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags" (Y page 45). See "Children in the vehicle" for further information on children travelling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint sys- tems (Y page 46). Important safety notes G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an acci- dent or triggering unexpectedly, for exam- ple. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an airbag sys- tem to accommodate a person with disabil- ities, contact a smart centre. Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine 38 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 49 · Applies to: 450, 451

detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is star- ted. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is run- ning G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig- gered unintentionally or might not be trig- gered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for example. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; are part of the deactivation system of the front-passenger front airbag. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF : lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disa- bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON ; lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is ena- bled. If, in the case of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front- passenger front airbag is deployed. Depending on the person in the front- passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air- bag must be enabled or disabled depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. There- fore, always observe the information on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 46). There you will also find instructions on backwards and forwards-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp must be on. The front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR- BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front- passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front- passenger seat should not be used. Be sure to observe the notes on "Activat- ing/deactivating the front-passenger airbag" as well as "Seat belts" (Y page 50) (Y page 40) and "Airbags" (Y page 43). There you can also find information on the correct seat posi- tion. Occupant safety 39

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Observe the information on the airbag

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 50 · Applies to: 450, 451

deactivation system of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 50). Seat belts Introduction A correctly worn seat belt is the most effec- tive means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of a colli- sion or if the vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants com- ing into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. The seat belt also helps to keep the vehicle occu- pants in the best position in relation to the airbag being deployed. The seat belt system consists of: Rseat belts Rbelt tensioners and belt force limiters If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply by the seat belt guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in the event of a collision so that it fits tightly across your body. However, it does not pull the vehicle occupants back in the direction of the seat backrest. The belt tensioner does not, however, cor- rect an incorrect seat position or correct the routing of a seat belt that is worn incorrectly. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Other- wise, the belt tensioner could be trig- gered in the event of an accident and would have to be replaced. Important safety notes G WARNING The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always make sure that all vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belt properly and are seated correctly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the back- rest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without a suitable, additional restraint system. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system. 40 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If a child under twelve years of age and less

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 51 · Applies to: 450, 451

than 1.50 m tall is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this smart vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" in this Owner's Manual (Y page 46) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions. G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an acci- dent. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or fail to be deployed when required. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify safety belts, seat belt ten- sioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not dam- aged or worn and are clean. After an acci- dent, have the seat belts checked immedi- ately at a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifi- cally for your vehicle by smart. Any such modifications could invalidate the vehi- cle's general operating permit. Correct use of the seat belt Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a win- ter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can forces which occur be dis- tributed across the surface of the seat belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the centre of your shoul- der. The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm. Rthe lap belt passes across your lap as tightly and as low down as possible. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and never across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, press the lap belt down into your hip joints and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or specta- cles, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be Occupant safety 41

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

crushed between the vehicle occupant

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 52 · Applies to: 450, 451

and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 198). Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 41). For easy fastening, the seat belt is guided through a belt loop on the side of the driv- er's seat. X Adjust the seat (Y page 78). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt out- let = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoul- der section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could dam- age the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no lon- ger fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop. X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; and guide it back towards belt outlet =. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, a warning tone may sound. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. i If you are using an ISOFIX child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the child is not secured using the seat belt of the front-passenger seat, 42 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

the belt warning may be activated. In

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 53 · Applies to: 450, 451

this case, you can insert the belt tongue of the seat belt into the belt buckle belonging to the front-passenger seat. To do this, guide the seat belt between the ISOFIX child restraint system and the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Airbags Introduction The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An airbag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. It is not a replacement for the seat belt. The airbag offers additional protection in applicable accident situa- tions. Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other (Y page 45). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatali- ties. It is also not possible to completely rule out a risk of injury caused by an airbag due to the speed at which the airbag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat posi- tion, the airbag cannot perform its inten- ded protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includ- ing pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the air- bags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. RAdjust the seats properly before begin- ning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driv- er's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out- side. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child restraint systems. ROnly secure a child to the front- passenger seat when the front-passenger front airbag is disabled, and only then in a rearward-facing child restraint sys- Occupant safety 43

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

tem. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 54 · Applies to: 450, 451

cator lamp is permanently lit, the front- passenger front airbag is disabled (Y page 39). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 46) and on the "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 51) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lation instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- vent the airbag from functioning cor- rectly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, the door and the door pillar (B-pillar). Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors or side windows. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occu- pants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Front airbags Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air- bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. When deployed, the front airbags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 39). Driver's kneebag 44 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driver's kneebag : deploys under the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 55 · Applies to: 450, 451

steering column. The driver's kneebag is triggered together with the front airbags. The driver's kneebag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat. Head/thorax airbags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- vent the deployment of the airbags inte- grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by smart. Head/thorax airbags : deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the head/thorax airbag offers additional head and thorax protec- tion. However, it does not protect the arms. Deployment of belt tensioners and air- bags Important safety notes G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tension- ers which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop. smart recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warn- ing lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to per- sons suffering from asthma or other pul- monary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle imme- diately or open the window in order to pre- vent breathing difficulties. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehi- cle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Occupant safety 45

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Based on the evaluation of this data, the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 56 · Applies to: 450, 451

restraint system control unit triggers the seat belt tensioners in the event of a head- on or rear collision. A seat belt tensioner can only be triggered if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 38) Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat If the restraint system control unit detects a high severity of an accident, in certain head-on collisions, additional compo- nents of the restraint system are deployed independently of each other: Rfront airbags and driver's kneebag The front-passenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 39). The activation threshold for the seat belt tensioners and airbags is determined based on the evaluation of the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/ deployment process should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or accel- eration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and meas- ured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient decelera- tion occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated inde- pendently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. The head/thorax airbag will deploy on the side on which an impact occurs, independ- ent from the seat belt tensioner and seat belt usage i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is deter- mined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle decel- eration or acceleration, and the appa- rent type of accident: Rhead-on collision Rside impact Children in the vehicle Important safety notes If a child younger than 12 years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for smart vehicles. The child restraint system 46 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

must be appropriate to the age, weight

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 57 · Applies to: 450, 451

and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- cle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint sys- tem. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave chil- dren unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular atten- tion must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 41). Child restraint system Observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 53). For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use a child restraint system rec- ommended by smart (Y page 56). G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Children in the vehicle 47

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Always fit child restraint systems prop-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 58 · Applies to: 450, 451

erly, even if they are not being used. Make

sure that you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation

instructions.

You will find further information on stow-

ing objects, luggage or loads under "Load-

ing guidelines" (Y page 198).

G WARNING

Child restraint systems or their securing

systems that have been damaged or subjec-

ted to a load in an accident cannot perform

their intended protective function. In the

event of an accident, sharp braking or a

sudden change in direction, the child may

not be held securely. There is an increased

risk of serious or even fatal injuries.

Immediately replace child restraint sys-

tems that have been damaged or subjected to

a load in an accident. Have the child

restraint securing systems checked in a

qualified specialist workshop before fit-

ting a child restraint system again.

Securing systems for child restraint sys-

tems include:

Rthe seat belt system

Rthe ISOFIX securing rings

Rthe Top Tether anchorages

i If you install a child restraint system

on the front-passenger seat, make sure

that the backrest is securely engaged

(Y page 80).

i If a child is carried on the front-

passenger seat, be sure to observe the

information on "Child restraint systems

on the front-passenger seat"

(Y page 51). There you will also find

information on disabling the front-

passenger front airbag.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle

interior and on the child restraint system.

ISOFIX child seat securing system

G WARNING

ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer

sufficient protective effect for children

whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are

secured using the safety belt integrated in

the child restraint system. The child could,

for example, not be restrained correctly in

the event of an accident. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use

ISOFIX child restraint systems with which

the child is also secured with the vehicle

seat belt. Also secure the child restraint

system with the Top Tether belt, if availa-

ble.

When fitting a child restraint system, be

sure to observe the manufacturer's instal-

lation instructions and the instructions

for correct use of the child restraint sys-

tem (Y page 53).

Before every trip, make sure that the ISO-

FIX child restraint system is engaged cor-

rectly in both ISOFIX securing rings.

ISOFIX securing rings X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems. ISOFIX securing rings : for an ISOFIX child restraint system are fitted to the front-passenger seat. 48 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Secure child restraint systems without an

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 59 · Applies to: 450, 451

ISOFIX child seat securing system using

the seat belts in the vehicle. When fitting a

child restraint system, be sure to observe

the manufacturer's installation and oper-

ating instructions and the instructions for

correct use of the child restraint system

(Y page 53).

If you are using an ISOFIX child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat whereby

the child is not secured using the seat belt

of the front-passenger seat, the belt warn-

ing may be activated (Y page 42).

To deactivate the belt warning for the

front-passenger, proceed as follows:

X Insert the seat belt tongue into the

buckle before the child restraint system

is fitted to the front-passenger seat.

X Then fit the ISOFIX child restraint sys-

tem to the front-passenger seat (with

seat belt fastened).

Make sure that the seat belt does not

become damaged.

Top Tether

Introduction

Top Tether provides an additional connec-

tion between the child restraint system

secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It

helps reduce the risk of injury even fur-

ther. If the child restraint system is fitted

with a Top Tether belt, this should always

be used.

Top Tether anchorages

Loop ; Top Tether anchorage ; Top Tether anchorage = Top Tether hook ? Top Tether belt Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the luggage compartment floor. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt ? back over the head restraint, keeping it as central as possible, into the luggage compartment through loop :. X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether belt = into Top Tether anchorage ;. Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. Children in the vehicle 49

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ensure that:

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 60 · Applies to: 450, 451

RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown. RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always com- ply with the child restraint system man- ufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Disabling/activating the front- passenger front airbag G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air- bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehi- cle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. You may only transport a child on the front-passenger seat if they are seated in a suitable rearward or forward- facing child restraint system. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indica- tor lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an acci- dent. The child could be struck by the air- bag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co- driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat. For more infor- mation, see "Problems with automatic front-passenger airbag deactivation" (Y page 53). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and you position the front- passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is on. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front- passenger seat accordingly. Additionally, always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. 50 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 61 · Applies to: 450, 451

restraint system If you use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, you must disable the front-passenger front airbag. The airbag-off switch for manually acti- vating and disabling the front-passenger front airbag is in the dashboard on the front-passenger side. X Push in airbag-off switch : beyond the point of resistance. X To disable the front-passenger front airbag: turn airbag-off switch : anti- clockwise. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indi- cator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and stays on when the ignition is switched on (Y page 39). X To activate the front-passenger front airbag: turn airbag-off switch : clock- wise. The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indica- tor lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and stays on when the ignition is switched on (Y page 39). The passenger airbag is enabled when the ignition is switched on unless the passenger airbag has been manually disa- bled. If the passenger airbag is deactiva- ted and the ignition is switched on, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator lamp in the overhead control panel (Y page 39) lights up permanently. Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat General notes If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on "Disabling the front-passenger front airbag" (Y page 50). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Rthe enabling or disabling of the front- passenger front airbag by mistake Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Please observe the warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor, see the illus- tration. G WARNING If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is Children in the vehicle 51

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

off, the front-passenger front airbag can

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 62 · Applies to: 450, 451

deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Rearward-facing child restraint system Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 39) is the front-passenger front airbag disabled. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 53) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat, always move the front- passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the front- passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the front- passenger seat belt guide. If necessary, adjust the front-passenger seat accord- ingly. 52 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with automatic front-passenger airbag deactivation

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 63 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indica- tor lamp on the over- head control panel is lit. The front-passenger airbag has been disabled manually (Y page 50). X Nobody may use the front-passenger seat unless a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system is being used. The front-passenger airbag has not been disabled manually (Y page 50). The airbag deactivation is malfunctioning. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF × indica- tor lamp on the over- head control panel is lit. The passenger airbag has been manually activated (Y page 50). The system operates correctly. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indica- tor lamp does not light up if the passenger airbag on the over- head control panel was activated manually. The airbag system is malfunctioning. X Nobody may use the front-passenger seat. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Introduction Only child restraint systems which are approved in accordance with the ECE stand- ard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the vehicle. For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area of use is restricted. The max- imum size setting of the child restraint system is not possible due to possible con- tact with the roof. "Universal" category child restraint sys- tems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal". Example: approval label on the child restraint system "Universal" category child restraint sys- tems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF or IUF according to the tables "Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" or Children in the vehicle 53

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

"Suitability of the seats for attaching an

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 64 · Applies to: 450, 451

ISOFIX child restraint system". Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "Semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manu- facturer or visit their website. Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat – if you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat: X Always pay attention to the instructions under "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 51). There you will find instructions on how to correctly route the shoulder belt strap from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoul- der belt guide on the child restraint sys- tem (Y page 52). X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. X Move the backrest to an almost vertical position. The base of the child restraint system must lie fully against the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The back of a forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the front-passenger backrest. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the backrest angle accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lation instructions. 54 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 65 · Applies to: 450, 451

In addition, always observe the information given under "Child restraint system" (Y page 47), as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions. Legend for the table: X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 56). Suitable for semi-universal child-restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manu- facturer's vehicle model list. Front-passenger seat Weight categories Front-passenger front air- bag is activated Front-passenger front air- bag is deactivated1 Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems In addition, always observe the information given under "Child restraint system" (Y page 47), as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions. Legend for the table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 56). The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manu- facturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. 1 The front-passenger front airbag must be deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be on. Children in the vehicle 55

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Weight category

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 66 · Applies to: 450, 451

Size category Equipment Front- passenger seat Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X 0 up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 IL1 0+ up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 IL1 D ISO/R2 IL1 C ISO/R3 IL1 I 9 kg up to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years D ISO/R2 IL1 C ISO/R3 IL1 B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF Recommended child restraint systems General notes Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 51) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 53). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any smart centre. The smart fortwo does not have automatic child seat recognition. X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, disable the front-passenger airbag (Y page 50). 1 The front-passenger front airbag must be deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be on. 56 Children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 67 · Applies to: 450, 451

Weight category Manufac- turer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...)2 Category 0: up to 10 kg up to approx- imately 6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 Category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approx- imately 15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 Category I: 9 kg up to 18 kg between approx- imately 9 months and 4 years Britax Römer DUO PLUS 03 301133 04 301133 970 16 00 Category II/III: 15 kg up to 36 kg from approx- imately 4 years to 12 years Britax Römer KIDFIX3 04 301198 970 19 00 Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems for the "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category Weight cate- gory Size cate- gory Manufac- turer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order num- ber2 Category 0+: up to 13 kg E Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 03 301146 04 301146 B6 6 86 8224 Category I: 9 kg up to 18 kg B1 Britax Römer DUO PLUS 03 301133 04 301133 A 000 970 16 00 2 Colour code 9H95 3 Before fitting the KIDFIX child restraint system in the vehicle, always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. These also contain information on the different installation methods possible. Children in the vehicle 57

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Pets in the vehicle

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 68 · Applies to: 450, 451

G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unse- cured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. They could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal trans- port box. Protection against theft Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. X To activate: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid key that is left inside the vehicle. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. Anti-theft alarm system Activating X Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed. Rno objects, such as mascots, are hang- ing from the rear-view mirror or grab handles. This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe tailgate is closed Rthe service cover is closed. X Press the & button on the key. The alarm system is primed after approx- imately 30 seconds. i If the service cover is open or is not properly closed, the vehicle will be locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. To remind you that the service cover is not secured, a warning tone sounds for 30 seconds. Ensure that the service cover is properly closed. Only then is the anti-theft alarm system cor- rectly primed and the service cover properly secured. Deactivating X Press the % button on the key. or X Unlock the vehicle by using the key in the emergency lock. and Switch the ignition on. Examples for triggering the alarm A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Rthe vehicle by using the key in the emer- gency lock Ra door Rthe tailgate Rthe service cover 58 Protection against theft

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching off the alarm

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 69 · Applies to: 450, 451

X To switch off the alarm: press the % button on the key. The alarm is switched off. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: Rabs (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 59) RDistance warning function (Y page 60) Resp® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 61) REBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion) (Y page 62) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety sys- tems can neither reduce the risk of acci- dent nor override the laws of physics. Driv- ing safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special atten- tion to the notes on tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths, etc. (Y page 240). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driv- ing safety systems described in this sec- tion work as effectively as possible. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart, or fine-link snow chains that are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General notes abs regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! abs warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 59). When abs is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the informa- tion on the abs warning lamp (Y page 185) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 170). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety sys- tems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Driving safety systems 59

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 70 · Applies to: 450, 451

diately at a qualified specialist workshop. abs works from a speed of about 6 km/h, regardless of road-surface conditions. abs works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Braking X If abs intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If abs intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indi- cation of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Distance warning function General notes The distance warning function can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such an accident. If the distance warning func- tion detects that there is a risk of a col- lision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Starting the engine also switches on the distance warning function. Important safety notes G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situa- tions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and com- plex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning func- tion may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warn- ing function alone. Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 59). In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cov- ering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflec- tions, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a dif- ferent line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the distance warning system Please observe the information in the section on running-in the vehicle (Y page 114). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and oper- ation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where 60 Driving safety systems

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

there is no visible damage to the front of

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 71 · Applies to: 450, 451

the vehicle. Function X To switch off: press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. X To switch on: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds: Rof around 30 km/h or more, if, over sev- eral seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insuf- ficient. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rof around 7 km/h or more, if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An inter- mittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particu- larly complicated but non-critical driv- ing conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehi- cle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of around 70 km/h, the dis- tance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 59). esp® monitors driving stability and trac- tion, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If esp® detects that the vehicle is deviat- ing from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. esp® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. esp® can also sta- bilise the vehicle during braking. ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 59). ETS traction control is part of esp®. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for exam- ple if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel with traction. Important safety notes G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 61

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! If you test the parking brake using a

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 72 · Applies to: 450, 451

brake dynamometer, switch the ignition off. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. Observe the notes on esp® when towing away your vehicle with the rear axle raised (Y page 232). If the ÷ esp® warning lamp lights up permanently, esp® or hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 187) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 171). i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will esp® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General notes If the ÷ esp® warning lamp goes out before the journey begins, esp® is auto- matically active. If esp® intervenes, the ÷ esp® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If esp® intervenes: X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the pre- vailing road and weather conditions. crosswind assist General notes Strong crosswind gusts can impair the roadholding of your vehicle when driving straight ahead. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated in esp® noticeably reduces these impairments. Depending on the direction and intensity of the side wind, esp® is activated auto- matically. esp® intervenes with stabilising braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. crosswind assist is active at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. Important safety notes crosswind assist does not work if esp® is disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion) General notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 59). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- dent. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling character- istics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 187) as well as display messages (Y page 169). 62 Driving safety systems

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ............................ 64

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 73 · Applies to: 450, 451

Key ................................................ 64 Doors .............................................. 68 Luggage compartment ......................... 71 Side windows .................................... 72 Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof ................................. 75 63

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 74 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Key Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unattended in the vehi- cle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other peo- ple or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncom- ing traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped Children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the manual transmission into neutral Rstarting the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the key out of the reach of children. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical instal- lations. Do not keep the key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rwith metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Only for England: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsu- pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- dren, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. The double-lock function is activated if you press the locking button twice when locking the vehicle. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- cle. 64 Key

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Key functions

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 75 · Applies to: 450, 451

% Unlocks the vehicle ; º Opens the tailgate = & Locks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press button :. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 2 minutes of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rprotection against theft is reactivated X To unlock and open the tailgate: press and hold button ; on the key. X To lock centrally: press button =. The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash twice. Only for England: X To activate the double-lock function: press button = twice. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Upon activation of the double-lock func- tion, the turn signals flash twice long and three times short. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsi- ble recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsi- ble manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a qualified specialist work- shop or to a collection point for used batteries. smart recommends that you have the bat- teries changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2016 3V cell battery. Key 65

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Remove screw : turning anti-clockwise

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 76 · Applies to: 450, 451

using a suitably sized Phillips screw- driver and put in a safe place. X Insert a suitable tool, e.g. a coin, into the opening of the key. Turn the tool until battery tray cover ; opens. When doing so, do not hold cover ; shut. X Remove battery tray cover ;. X Remove battery =. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X Insert battery tray cover ; into the housing and press to close. X Replace screw : and tighten clockwise using a suitably sized Phillips screw driver. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. 66 Key

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the key

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 77 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Do this by pressing the % or & button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. If this does not work: X Change the key battery if necessary (Y page 65). X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock (Y page 70) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking (Y page 70). There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Do this by pressing the % or & button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The key is faulty. X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock (Y page 70) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking (Y page 70). X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. The engine cannot be started using the key. The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 225). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 228). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The steering lock is mechanically blocked. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. When you turn the key, turn the steering wheel in both directions. Key 67

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Doors

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 78 · Applies to: 450, 451

Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unattended in the vehi- cle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other peo- ple or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncom- ing traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped Children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the manual transmission into neutral Rstarting the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the key out of the reach of children. Preferably stow luggage or loads in the luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 198). Only for England: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsu- pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- dren, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If you press the locking button on the key twice when locking the vehicle: Rthe turn signals flash twice long and three times short Rthe double-lock function is activated It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside X Pull door handle :. The door opens. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. X Pull door handle :. The door unlocks and opens. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 59). For England only: If when locking the vehicle you press twice on the locking button on the key: Rthe turn signals flash long twice and short three times Rthe double-lock function is activated It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. 68 Doors

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Centrally locking or unlocking the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 79 · Applies to: 450, 451

vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. X To lock: when the vehicle is unlocked, press button :. If all the doors and the tailgate are closed, the vehicle locks. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X To lock the vehicle from inside when getting out: open the driver's door. The front-passenger door and the tail- gate must be closed. X Press the locking button (Y page 69). X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds. Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap are locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked. X To unlock: when the vehicle is locked, press button :. The vehicle is unlocked. Indicator lamp ; goes out. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 59). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlocking is taken into account, if: Rit was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rit was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, then only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key. Only for England: If you press the locking button on the key twice when locking the vehicle: Rthe turn signals flash twice long and three times short Rthe double-lock function is activated It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Automatic locking feature X To deactivate: with the ignition switched on, press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate with the ignition switched on, press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. Doors 69

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You could therefore be locked out if:

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 80 · Applies to: 450, 451

Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dyna- mometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on or off in the smart Media-Sys- tem; see the separate operating instruc- tions. Unlocking the driver's door (emer- gency lock) If you can no longer unlock the vehicle using the remote control key, use the emer- gency lock. If you use the key in the emergency lock to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti- theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 59). X Carefully remove the cover from the emergency lock. X Insert the key into the emergency lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. i For right-hand-drive vehicles, the key must be inserted into the emergency lock of the passenger's door. X Turn the key anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The door is unlocked. X Turn the key back and remove it. X Replace the cover on the emergency lock and press until it engages. Locking the driver's door (emergency locking) If you can no longer lock the vehicle using the remote control key, use the locking but- ton on the instrument cluster (Y page 69). X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the tailgate. X Press the locking button (Y page 69). X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds. Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap are locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked. If this does not work, use the emergency locking. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the tailgate. X Press the locking button (Y page 69). X Check whether the front-passenger door is locked. If necessary, carry out the fol- lowing steps on both doors. X Insert the tip of the key into slit :. X Turn the key anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 2. On the passenger door, the direction of rotation is reversed. 70 Doors

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i For right-hand-drive vehicles, the key

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 81 · Applies to: 450, 451

in the driver's door must be turned clockwise. X Close the driver's door. X Check that the doors are locked. i If you lock the vehicle using the emer- gency locking, the tailgate and fuel filler flap are not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. Luggage compartment Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maxi- mum load of 100 kg. It may otherwise become damaged. ! The tailgates swing to the rear, both upwards and downwards, when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is suf- ficient clearance above, behind and below the tailgates. i The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" sec- tion (Y page 265). Preferably stow luggage or loads in the luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 198). Do not leave the key in the luggage com- partment. You could otherwise lock your- self out. Opening or closing Opening the upper tailgate X If the vehicle is locked, first press the % button on the key. Press button :. The upper tailgate is now unlocked. or X Press and hold the º button on the key. The upper tailgate opens slightly. X Swing the upper tailgate up. Luggage compartment 71

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening the lower tailgate

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 82 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Pull release catch : upwards. Swing the lower tailgate down. Closing the tailgate X Swing the lower tailgate upwards until it engages audibly. X Pull the upper tailgate down and push closed. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key. Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Side window reversing feature In vehicles with the comfort package, the side windows are equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from travelling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corre- sponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature can- not prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If you close a side window again immedi- ately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or max- imum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trap- 72 Side windows

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ped in the closing area in the process. This

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 83 · Applies to: 450, 451

poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in

the closing area. To stop the closing proc-

ess, release the switch or push the switch

again to reopen the side window.

Opening or closing the side windows

The switches for both side windows are

located on the driver's door. There is also a

switch for the front-passenger side window

on the front-passenger door.

The switch on the driver’s door takes prec-

edence.

Left ; Right X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the cor- responding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic closing is started. X To close manually: pull the correspond- ing button and hold it. X Vehicles with the comfort package: To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic closing is started. X To interrupt automatic opening/closing: press/pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance while opening, automatic operation is started. In vehicles with the comfort package, you can also start automatic operation when closing. To do so, pull the switch beyond the point of resistance. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. i You can continue to operate the side windows after turning the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or removing the key. This function remains active for 3 minutes or until you open a door. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if: Rthe side window opens again slightly after being closed fully. Rthe side window can no longer be fully opened or closed. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 73). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 73). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset Side windows 73

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

correctly. If this is not the case, repeat

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 84 · Applies to: 450, 451

the steps above again. 74 Side windows

Opening and closing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the side windows

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 85 · Applies to: 450, 451

G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the win- dow guide. X Remove the objects. X Close the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you can- not see the cause. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment fea- ture. Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight. X To open: press the roller sunblind up by the outer edge of recess : and slide it backwards. X To close: pull the roller sunblind forward by the outer edge of recess : until it is fully closed. Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof 75

Opening and closing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 86 · Applies to: 450, 451

76 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ............................ 78

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 87 · Applies to: 450, 451

Correct driver's seat position ............. 78 Seats .............................................. 79 Steering wheel ................................. 83 Mirrors ........................................... 84 77

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 88 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. Example Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 79). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop- erly. Adjusting the seat (Y page 80) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 83). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusts the steering wheel (Y page 83) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 40). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 42). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 84) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. 78 Correct driver's seat position

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Seats

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 89 · Applies to: 450, 451

Important safety notes G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it could unexpectedly move while driving. This could cause you to lose con- trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always ensure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehi- cle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the back- rest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 43) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 46). ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occu- pied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Seats 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Adjusting the seat

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 90 · Applies to: 450, 451

Illustration of variant 1 Illustration of variant 2 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Remove the seat belt from the belt loop by opening the press stud. X Lift handle = and slide the seat for- wards or rearwards. X Release lever = again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. Backrest angle Variant 1 X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel : forwards or back- wards. Variant 2 X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Pull release lever :. The backrest is released. X Move the backrest forwards or backwards. X Let go of release lever : again. Seat height4 X Only variant 2: pull handle ; up or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Folding down the front-passenger seat You can increase the size of the luggage compartment by folding the front- passenger seat backrest forwards. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 198) and the notes in the "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" section (Y page 51). Folding down Illustration of variant 1 4 Only driver's seat, depending on equipment. 80 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Illustration of variant 2

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 91 · Applies to: 450, 451

Variant 1: X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Turn handwheel : forward until the desired seat backrest position is ach- ieved Variant 2: X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Hold onto the backrest at the head restraint with one hand. X Pull release lever :. The backrest is released. X Fold the backrest forwards. Folding back G WARNING If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the event of an accident. RAs a result, a backrest which is not engaged would press you into the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could additionally cause injury. RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or loads in the boot. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every journey, make sure that the backrest is engaged as described. Variant 1: X Turn handwheel : back until the desired seat backrest position is achieved Variant 2: X Pull release lever :. The backrest is released. X Fold the backrest backwards. X Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged again. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensi- tivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X To switch on: press button ;. Indicator lamp : in the button lights up. X To switch off: press button ;. Indicator lamp : in the button goes out. Seats 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i If the battery voltage is too low, the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 92 · Applies to: 450, 451

seat heating may switch off. The seat heating switches off automati- cally after about 10 minutes. 82 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the seat heating

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 93 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat heating has

switched off prema-

turely or cannot be

switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical

consumers are switched on.

X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as

the rear window heating or interior lighting.

Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating

will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNING

You could lose control of the vehicle while

driving if you:

Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel

or mirror

Rfasten the seat belt.

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or

mirror and fasten the seat belt before

starting the engine.

G WARNING

Children could become trapped by the

steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a

risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

key with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING

The steering wheel may move unexpectedly

if you adjust it while driving. This could

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that the steering wheel is locked

before driving off. Never unlock the steer-

ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion.

Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height X Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Set desired steering wheel height ;. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. To do so, try and push the steering wheel up or down. Steering wheel 83

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mirrors

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 94 · Applies to: 450, 451

Rear-view mirror X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. Adjusting the exterior mirrors manually X To adjust the mirror: move lever : to the right or left, up or down. Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri- cally X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition (Y page 115). X To select an exterior mirror: turn con- trol = to position 1 for the left exte- rior mirror or to position 2 for the right exterior mirror. X To adjust the mirror: move control = to the right or left, up or down. The exterior mirrors can be heated by switching on the rear window heating (Y page 109). Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed for- wards or backwards out of position, push the exterior mirror into the correct posi- tion manually. 84 Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ............................ 86

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 95 · Applies to: 450, 451

Exterior lighting .............................. 86 Interior lighting .............................. 90 Replacing bulbs ................................ 91 Windscreen wipers ............................ 95 85

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 96 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, smart recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some coun- tries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self- imposed obligations. Driving abroad General notes If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border. This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illumi- nate as large an area of the edge of the car- riageway. Converting to symmetrical dipped beam X Open the service cover (Y page 208). X Turn the screw with an appropriate tool one quarter of a turn toward °. Have the correct setting of the dipped beam headlamps checked at a qualified special- ist workshop. Converting to asymmetrical dipped beam after returning Convert the headlamps back to asymmetri- cal dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border. X Open the service cover (Y page 208). X Turn the screw with an appropriate tool one quarter of a turn toward q to the original position. Have the correct setting of the dipped- beam headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 86 Exterior lighting

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Exterior lighting settings

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 97 · Applies to: 450, 451

Operation : Combination switch control ; Marking 3$ Lights off 4 T Side lamp, parking lamp, licence plate lighting 5 K Main-beam headlamps 6 à Automatic headlamp mode, con- trolled by the light sensor 7 L Dipped-beam headlamps D Marking E Combination switch middle ring Ì N Foglamps Í R Rear foglamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn combination switch control : until à or $ is at marking ;. When in the à position the exterior lighting switches off automatically if you: Rswitch off the engine Ropen the driver's door Rlock the vehicle Rdo not switch on the main-beam head- lamps Automatic headlamp mode à is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RWith the engine running: depending on the ambient light conditions, the day- time driving lights or the parking and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn combination switch control : until à is at marking ;. G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. The daytime driving lights improve the detectability of your vehicle during the day. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and the day- time driving lights switch off. Exterior lighting 87

Lights and windscreen wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dipped-beam headlamps

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 98 · Applies to: 450, 451

X To switch on: turn combination switch control : until L is at marking ;. The L indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up. Side lamps X To switch on: turn combination switch control : until T is at marking ;. Foglamps Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function. X To switch on: make sure that the side lamps or dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. X Turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at N. The N indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral posi- tion. X To switch off: turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at N. The N indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral posi- tion. i If you switch off the engine (only in the à position) or turn off the lights, the foglamps are also switched off. Rear foglamp X To switch on: make sure that the side lamps or dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. X Turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at R. The R indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral posi- tion. X To switch off: turn combination switch middle ring E until marking D is at R. The R indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out. After releasing, the middle ring returns automatically back to the neutral posi- tion. i If you switch off the engine (only in the à position) or turn off the lights, the rear foglamps are also switched off. Adjusting the headlamp range The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. The cone of light changes when seats are occupied or when the luggage compartment is loaded or unloaded. This can impair visibility and dazzle oncoming traffic. 88 Exterior lighting

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driver's seat occupied or

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 99 · Applies to: 450, 451

g Driver's seat occupied or driver's seat and front- passenger seat occupied 1 Other loading 2, 3 and 4 Settings are not required X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn headlamp range control : to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Switching on the turn signals X Start the engine. X To indicate briefly: press the combina- tion switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (right turn signal) or ; (left turn signal). The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (right turn signal) or ; (left turn signal). Switching on the main-beam headlamps and headlamp flasher Main-beam headlamps X To switch on: start the engine. X Turn the combination switch control until K or à (if available) is at the marking. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The K indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up. X To deactivate: move combination switch : back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out. Headlamp flasher X To switch on: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow ;. Exterior lighting 89

Lights and windscreen wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Hazard warning lamps

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 100 · Applies to: 450, 451

The hazard warning lamps automatically

switch on if:

Ran airbag is deployed

Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a

speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a

standstill

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch

on a turn signal using the combination

switch, only the turn signal lamp on the

corresponding side of the vehicle will

flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:

press button :.

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-

matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of

above 10 km/h again after a full brake

application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate

if the ignition is switched off.

Headlamps misted up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions

may cause moisture to form in the head-

lamp. This moisture does not affect the

functionality of the headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview

Interior lighting ; Depending on the position of the switch: Interior lighting switched on Automatic interior lighting control on Interior lighting switched off The interior lighting is switched on when a door is open: if the corresponding door is closed correctly the interior lighting goes out. Interior lighting control If the doors are unlocked with the remote control, the interval timer for the interior lighting is triggered. The interval timer restarts when a door is opened. The front interior lighting and the luggage compartment light go out gradually. The interior lighting interval timer is switched off: Rif a door remains open, the interior lighting switches off after 15 minutes without dimming Rif all doors (with additional locking mechanism) are closed, the interior lighting switches off after 15 seconds 90 Interior lighting

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rif all doors (without locking mechanism)

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 101 · Applies to: 450, 451

are closed, the interior lighting

switches off after 3 to 4 minutes

Ras soon as the engine is started and for as

long as the engine is running

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

G WARNING

Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can

become very hot during use. When replacing

a bulb, you could burn yourself on these

components. There is a risk of injury.

Allow these components to cool down before

replacing the bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if

its glass tube has been scratched.

The bulb may explode if:

Ryou touch it

Rit is hot

Ryou drop it

Ryou scratch it

Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps

designed for that purpose. Only fit spare

bulbs of the same type and the specified

voltage.

Marks on the glass tube reduce the service

life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube

with your bare hands. If necessary, clean

the glass tube when cold with alcohol or

spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth.

Protect bulbs from moisture during oper-

ation. Do not allow bulbs to come into con-

tact with liquids.

Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 91).

If you require assistance replacing bulbs,

consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the new bulb still does not light up, con-

sult a qualified specialist workshop.

The daytime driving lights and part of the

rear light clusters of your vehicle are

equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not

replace these bulbs yourself. Contact a

qualified specialist workshop which has

the necessary specialist knowledge and

tools to carry out the work required.

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of

vehicle safety. You must therefore make

sure that these function correctly at all

times. Have the headlamp setting checked

regularly.

Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs

You can replace the following bulbs. The

details for the bulb type can be found in the

legend.

Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamp:

H4 60/55 W

; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

= Foglamps: H16

Tail lamps

Tail lamp/brake lamp: P 21 5 W ; Rear foglamp: P 21 W = Reversing lamp: W 16 W ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W Replacing bulbs 91

Lights and windscreen wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tail lamps (vehicles with partial LEDs)

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 102 · Applies to: 450, 451

Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

; Reversing lamp: W 16 W

Licence plate lighting: W 5 W

Side turn signal lamps: WY 5 W

Interior lighting: W 5 W Replacing the front bulbs Turn signals X To remove the cover in the front wheel arch: switch off the lighting system. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Press spring clip : down. X Slide cover ; back and remove it. 92 Replacing bulbs

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 103 · Applies to: 450, 451

remove. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clock- wise until it engages. X To fit the cover in the front wheel arch: insert cover ; again and lock in place. Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps X Switch off the lights. X Open the service cover (Y page 208). X Remove cover :. X Pull out the connector. X Simultaneously press retainer ; forward and to the right and then remove the lamp. X Insert the new bulb and engage it in place. X Insert the connector. X Position cover : and press into place. Front foglamps Due to their location, have the bulbs in the front foglamps changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. X Switch off the lights. X Remove the two screws : at the bottom of the front wheel arch using a suitable tool. X Bend back the cover using your hand. X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. X Take the bulb out of the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock- wise until it engages. X Bend the cover back into position. X Tighten the two screws : again. Side turn signal lamps Replacing bulbs 93

Lights and windscreen wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Insert a flat tool into recess : and lever

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 104 · Applies to: 450, 451

side turn signal lamp ; forwards and

out.

X Remove the bulb holder from side turn

signal lamp ; by turning it a quarter

turn anti-clockwise.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder into side turn sig-

nal lamp ; and turn it a quarter turn

clockwise.

X Insert side turn signal lamp ;.

Replacing the rear bulbs

Tail lamps

X Switch off the lights.

X To remove: open the upper and lower tail-

gate (Y page 71).

X Remove two screws : on the tail lamp

using a suitable slotted screwdriver.

X Carefully take out the lamp.

X To release the connector: insert a suit-

able slotted screwdriver under the plas-

tic hanger, lift a small plastic piece

upwards and remove the connector.

Bulb holder

Tail lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) ; Turn signals = Reversing lamp ? Rear foglamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) X Unclip four bulb holder tabs A and carefully remove the bulb holder. X Pull out the corresponding bulb. X Insert the new bulb. X Insert the bulb holder again. Four bulb holder tabs A must audibly engage. X Insert the connector. X Insert the lamp again. X Tighten the two screws : on the tail lamp again. Licence plate lighting X To remove: release catch : of the lamp lens using a suitable tool. X Remove the lamp lens. 94 Replacing bulbs

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Take bulb : out of the bulb holder.

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 105 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

X Re-insert the lamp lens into the licence

plate lamp.

Replacing the interior lighting

X Remove lamp lens : with a flat tool, e.g.

a screwdriver.

X Take the bulb to be replaced out of the

bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

X Insert lamp lens :.

Windscreen wipers

Switching the windscreen wipers

on/off

! Do not operate the windscreen wipers

when the windscreen is dry, as this could

damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust

that has collected on the windscreen can

scratch the glass if wiping takes place

when the windscreen is dry.

If it is necessary to switch on the wind-

screen wipers in dry weather conditions,

always operate them using washer fluid.

! If the windscreen wipers leave smears

on the windscreen after the vehicle has

been washed in an automatic car wash,

this may be due to wax or other residue.

Clean the windscreen with washer fluid

after an automatic car wash.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the

windscreen becomes dirty in dry weather

conditions, the windscreen wipers may

be activated inadvertently. This could

damage the windscreen wiper blades or

scratch the windscreen.

For this reason, you should always switch

off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch

Control for wiping frequency and sen- sitivity of the rain sensor 2 0 Windscreen wipers off 3 © Intermittent wipe

à Automatic wipe (rain sensor) 4 1 Continuous wipe, slow 5 2 Continuous wipe, fast B î Wipes with washer fluid X To switch on: turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press the combination switch to the © position or 1. or Windscreen wipers 95

Lights and windscreen wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Start the engine (Y page 115).

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 106 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Press the combination switch down or up

to the corresponding position.

X To wipe with washer fluid î: pull the

combination switch towards the steering

wheel.

X To switch off: press the combination

switch to position 0.

Position 2 changes to position 1 when the

engine is stopped.

In position 1 or in the © position, the

windscreen wipers stop automatically when

the engine is stopped and the driver's door

is opened.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in position

à the windscreen wipers stop automat-

ically when the engine is stopped.

The windscreen will no longer be wiped

properly if the wiper blades are worn. This

could prevent you from observing the traf-

fic conditions.

Intermittent wipe

Vehicles with a rain sensor: the appropri-

ate wiping frequency is automatically set

according to the intensity of the rain. With

intermittent wiping you can also adjust the

sensitivity of the rain sensor using con-

trol :. When the sensitivity is set to high,

the windscreen wiper wipes more fre-

quently.

X To switch on: start the engine

(Y page 115).

X Press the combination switch to the Ã

position.

The windscreen wipers sweep once.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch

Control 2 $ Rear window wiper off 3 è Rear window wiper on 4 ô Wiping with washer fluid X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine (Y page 115). X Turn control : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. ! Never open the service cover/tailgate if a windscreen wiper arm has been fol- ded away from the windscreen/rear win- dow. 96 Windscreen wipers

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Never fold a windscreen wiper arm with-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 107 · Applies to: 450, 451

out a wiper blade back onto the wind- screen/rear window. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm with- out a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen/rear window, the wind- screen/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. smart recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press the combination switch to the 5 position (Y page 95). The wiper arms move slowly upwards. X When the wiper arms are vertical in rela- tion to the service cover, turn the key to position 0 and remove it from the igni- tion lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- screen. X Press the two release clips ; on mount- ing ? in the direction of arrow = and pull away from the wiper arm. X Slide wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A until the wiper blade securing hook is revealed. X Remove wiper blade :. Fitting the wiper blades X Slide new wiper blade : in the direc- tion of arrow ? onto mounting = of wiper arm ;. Wiper blade : engages. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold wiper arm ; back onto the wind- screen. Replacing the rear window wiper blade Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until it engages. Windscreen wipers 97

Lights and windscreen wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Turn wiper blade ; in the direction of

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 108 · Applies to: 450, 451

the arrow until it is released from the retainer on the wiper arm. X Remove wiper blade ;. Fitting a wiper blade X Push new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm : until you feel it engage. X Turn wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window. 98 Windscreen wipers

Lights and windscreen wipers. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the windscreen wipers

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 109 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wip- ers do not stop or con- tinue wiping with the same speed regardless of a change in posi- tion. The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as you do so and switch off the engine. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the igni- tion lock and open the driver's door. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Then try to start the engine again. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified special- ist workshop. The windscreen wip- ers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as you do so and switch off the engine. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the igni- tion lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds. The windscreen wiper has stopped in the middle of the wind- screen. The windscreen wiper drive has stopped for safety reasons. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified special- ist workshop. The windscreen wip- ers fail completely. The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified special- ist workshop. Windscreen wipers 99

Lights and windscreen wipers. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 110 · Applies to: 450, 451

100 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ........................... 102

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 111 · Applies to: 450, 451

Overview of climate control systems .... 102 Operating the climate control system ... 105 Adjusting the air vents ...................... 111 101

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 112 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could other- wise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rair-conditioning system/automatic cli- mate control: switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the "demist windscreen" func- tion briefly, if required The heating, air-conditioning system and the automatic climate control regulate the temperature and humidity in the vehicle interior. They also filter undesirable sub- stances out of the air. The heating, air-conditioning system and automatic climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. They only function optimally when the side win- dows are closed. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather. This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and as well as pol- len. With automatic climate control, odours carried in the air are also reduced. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replac- ing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on envi- ronmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. 102 Overview of climate control systems

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Heating/air-conditioning system control panel

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 113 · Applies to: 450, 451

Sets the air distribution (Y page 107) ; Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (air-conditioning system only) (Y page 106) = Sets the airflow (Y page 108) ? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 109) Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off (for vehicles with heated exterior mir- rors only) A Sets the temperature (Y page 107) B Switches the air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 111) Notes on using the heating/air-condi- tioning system Heating/air-conditioning system Below, you can find a number of tips and recommendations for optimum use of the heating/air-conditioning system. RSwitch on climate control by turning control = clockwise to the desired position (except position 0). RChange the temperature settings in small increments only. To increase and reduce the temperature turn control A clockwise or anti-clock- wise. RRecommendation for demisting front windows at low exterior temperatures or in rain: switch air distribution con- trol : to the z position. Deactivate air-recirculation mode À. Turn air- flow control = to position 4.Turn tem- perature control A clockwise as far as possible. Only use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. RRecommendation for rapid cooling or heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set airflow control = to 3 or 4. RRecommendation for a constant interior temperature: set air flow control = to position 1 or 2. ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out- side odours or when in a tunnel. The win- dows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air- recirculation mode. Automatic start/stop system During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate Overview of climate control systems 103

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

control output, you can switch off the auto-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 114 · Applies to: 450, 451

matic start/stop system by pressing the automatic start/stop system button (Y page 119). 104 Overview of climate control systems

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Automatic climate control panel

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 115 · Applies to: 450, 451

Increases the airflow (Y page 108) ; Demists the windscreen (Y page 108) = Switches the air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 111) ? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 109) Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off (for vehicles with heated exterior mir- rors only) A Sets the air distribution (Y page 107) B Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 107) C Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 105) D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 106) E Reduces the airflow (Y page 108) F Sets the temperature (Y page 107) Optimum use of automatic climate con- trol Automatic climate control Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use climate control optimally. RActivate climate control primarily using the à button. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out- side odours or when in a tunnel. The win- dows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air- recirculation mode. Automatic start/stop system During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the auto- matic start/stop system by pressing the automatic start/stop system button (Y page 119). Operating the climate control system Switching the climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Operating the climate control system 105

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Therefore, only switch off climate control

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 116 · Applies to: 450, 451

briefly. Switching the sound on/off Heating/air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: turn airflow control = clockwise to the desired position (except position 0) (Y page 103). X To switch off: turn airflow control = anti-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 103). Automatic climate control X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamp under the à button lights up. or X Press the ó button. or X Press the ¬ button. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp under the ^ button lights up. or X Press the ô button repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Switching cooling with air dehumidi- fication on/off General notes The "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function is only available with the air- conditioning system or automatic climate control. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air- dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only switch off cooling with air dehumidification for a short period. The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. The "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function does not operate at low outside temperatures. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Switching the sound on/off Air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X Set airflow control = clockwise to posi- tion 1 or higher (Y page 108). X To switch on: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To switch on: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. Automatic climate control X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: press buttons ó and ¿. The indicator lamp under the ¿ button lights up. X To switch off: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp under the ¿ button goes out. 106 Operating the climate control system

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting climate control to automatic

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 117 · Applies to: 450, 451

mode General notes This function is only available with auto- matic climate control. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Setting automatic mode X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamp under the à button lights up. X To switch to manual mode: press the ó or ô button. or X Press the Á, P or O button. or X Press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp under the à button goes out. i If you adjust one of the functions by hand, the indicator lamp under the à button goes out. All other functions con- tinue to be regulated automatically. Setting the temperature Heating/air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To increase or reduce: turn temperature control A clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 103). Change the temperature settings in small increments only. Automatic climate control X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To increase or reduce: push temperature slider F to the right or left (Y page 105). For the maximum or minimum tempera- ture, push slider F completely to the right or left (Y page 105). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings Heating/air-conditioning system z Directs the airflow through the demister vents a Directs the airflow through the foot- well and demister vents O Directs the airflow through the foot- well air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre, side and footwell vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents i Recommendation for air distribution in winter: set thea setting. Recommendation for air distribution in summer: set the P setting. Automatic climate control Á Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the foot- well air vents i You can also activate several of the air distribution settings simultaneously. In order to do this, press several of the air distribution buttons. The air is then routed through different air vents. Operating the climate control system 107

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Recommendation for air distribution in

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 118 · Applies to: 450, 451

winter: set theÁ and O settings. Recommendation for air distribution in summer: set the P setting. Setting the air distribution Heating/air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X Turn air distribution control : clock- wise or anti-clockwise until the indi- cator is at the desired position (Y page 103). i You can turn the indicator to a position between two symbols. There are inter- mediate levels between the air distri- bution positions. Automatic climate control X Start the engine (Y page 115). X Press one or more of the Á, O or P buttons. The indicator lamp next to the respec- tive button selected lights up. Setting the airflow Heating/air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To increase or reduce: turn airflow con- trol = clockwise or anti-clockwise to one of the four detents (Y page 103). Automatic climate control X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To increase: press the ó button. With each press of the ó button, one indicator lamp next to the airflow but- tons lights up. X To decrease: press the ô button. With each press of the ô button, one indicator lamp next to the airflow but- tons goes out. Demisting the windscreen General notes You can use this function to demist the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. i You should only select the "Windscreen demisting" function until the wind- screen is clear again. Switching the sound on/off Heating/air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: turn air distribution con- trol : to the z position (Y page 103) . X Turn airflow control = to position 4 (Y page 103). X Turn temperature control A clockwise as far as possible (Y page 103). X Slide air distribution control B to the right (Y page 103). X To switch off: turn air distribution con- trol : to the desired position (apart from the z position) (Y page 103). X Turn air distribution control = and temperature control A anti-clockwise to the desired position (Y page 103). Automatic climate control X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button lights up. Automatic mode à is deac- tivated. The ¬ "Demist windscreen" function switches the automatic climate control to the following functions: Rcooling with air dehumidification on Rhigh airflow 108 Operating the climate control system

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rair distribution to the windscreen and

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 119 · Applies to: 450, 451

front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off X To switch off: press the ¬ button. or X Press the à button. or X Press the À button. or X Press the Á, P or O button. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button goes out. The rear window heating is turned off. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Heating/air-conditioning system X Air-conditioning system: activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion" function. X If the windows continue to mist up, acti- vate the "Windscreen demisting" func- tion (Y page 108). i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Automatic climate control X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehu- midification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, acti- vate the "Windscreen demisting" func- tion ¬. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Windows misted up on the outside Heating/air-conditioning system X Activate the windscreen wipers. X Set the air distribution to z. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Automatic climate control X Activate the windscreen wipers. X Set the air distribution to ¬. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Rear window heating General notes The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. The rear window heating can only be switched on and off when the engine is run- ning. The rear window heating automatically switches off after approximately 10 minutes. Vehicles with heated exterior mirrors: when you switch on the rear window heating, the exterior mirrors are also heated. When the rear window heating is switched off, the exterior mirror heating will also turn off. Switching the sound on/off Heating/air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up. X To switch off: press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button goes out. Operating the climate control system 109

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Automatic climate control

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 120 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp above the¤ button lights up. X To switch off: press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp above the ¤ button goes out. 110 Operating the climate control system

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the rear window heating

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 121 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heat- ing has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be activated again. Switching the air-recirculation mode on/off General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if you are in a tunnel or if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows misting up. Switching the sound on/off Heating/air-conditioning system X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: slide control B to the left (Y page 103). X To switch off: slide control B to the right (Y page 103). Automatic climate control X Start the engine (Y page 115). X To switch on: press the À button. The indicator lamp above theÀ button lights up. X To switch off: press the À button. or X Press the ¬ button. or X Press the à button. The indicator lamp above the À button goes out. Adjusting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. G WARNING If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant into the vehicle's ventilation system, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire. Never spray these or other agents into the ventilation system. Always have work on the ventilation system carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop. Adjusting the air vents 111

Climate control. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 122 · Applies to: 450, 451

air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the service cover and the windscreen free of block- ages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. i For optimum climate control in the vehicle, open the air vents fully. Setting the centre air vents X To adjust the air direction: hold centre air vent : or ; in the middle and turn and/or tilt it in the desired direction up, down, to the left or to the right. X To close the centre air vent: hold centre air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt inwards until the vent openings can no longer be seen. X To open the centre air vent: hold centre air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt outwards until the vent openings can be seen. Setting the side air vents X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent ; in the middle and turn and/or tilt in the desired direction up, down, to the left or to the right. X To close the side air vent: hold side air vent ; in the middle and tilt inwards until the vent openings can no longer be seen. X To open the side air vent: hold side air vent ; in the middle and tilt outwards until the vent openings can be seen. Demister vent : cannot be adjusted. 112 Adjusting the air vents

Climate control. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ........................... 114

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 123 · Applies to: 450, 451

Running-in notes ............................. 114 Driving .......................................... 114 Manual transmission ......................... 121 Automatic transmission .................... 122 Refuelling ...................................... 130 Parking ......................................... 132 Driving tips ................................... 134 Driving systems ............................... 139 113

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 124 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Running-in notes Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety sys- tems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New or replaced brake pads/linings and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced brak- ing effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RVehicles with automatic transmission: if possible, do not depress the acceler- ator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). RVehicles with automatic transmission: ideally drive in program E for the first 1500 km. After 1500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. You should also observe these notes on run- ning-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Observe the maximum permissible speed. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. 114 Driving

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 125 · Applies to: 450, 451

If you switch off the ignition while driv- ing, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Do not switch off the ignition while driv- ing. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. ! Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Drive off immedi- ately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slip- pery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. Key positions g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consum- ers) and drive position 3 To start the engine The steering wheel is locked when the key is removed from the ignition lock. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in Driving 115

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 126 · Applies to: 450, 451

of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poi- soning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ven- tilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. i The engine runs at a higher engine speed during a cold start so that the cat- alytic converter can reach operating temperature more quickly. The sound of the engine may change as a result. Manual transmission X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Engage neutral. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 123). The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 123). i You can start the engine in transmis- sion positions P and N. In order to start the engine in transmis- sion position N you must depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Starting procedure X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 115) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Pulling away General notes G WARNING Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the engine speed is above the engine idling speed and you then engage trans- mission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always keep the brake pedal firmly depressed and do not depress the acceler- ator pedal at the same time. ! Vehicles with manual transmission: change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Release the parking brake before driv- ing off. The parking brake can otherwise overheat, malfunction and wear out quickly. Accelerate gently when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic lock- ing feature (Y page 69). 116 Driving

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicles with automatic transmission: you

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 127 · Applies to: 450, 451

can only shift the transmission from posi-

tion P to the desired transmission position

if:

Rthe ignition is switched on

Ryou depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed and

Ryou press release button on the selector

lever (Y page 123).

Only then is the shift lock released.

i Vehicles with automatic transmission:

transmission shifts take place at higher

engine speeds after a cold start. This

helps the catalytic converter to reach its

operating temperature more quickly.

Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling

away forwards or in reverse on an uphill

gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short

time after you have removed your foot from

the brake pedal. This gives you enough time

to move your foot from the brake pedal to

the accelerator pedal and depress it before

the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNING

After a while, hill start assist no longer

holds the vehicle and it may roll away.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from the

brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never

leave the vehicle when it is held by hill

start assist.

Hill start assist is not active if:

Ryou pull away on level ground

Ryou pull away in a forward gear on a down-

hill slope

Ron vehicles with automatic transmis-

sion, the transmission is in position N.

Rthe parking brake is engaged.

Resp® is malfunctioning.

Automatic start/stop system

Introduction

The automatic start/stop system switches

the engine off automatically if the vehicle

is stopped under certain conditions.

When pulling away again, the engine starts

automatically. The automatic start/stop

system thereby helps you to reduce the fuel

consumption and emissions of your vehi-

cle.

General notes

Start/stop display (conditions are met) ; Start/stop display (conditions not met) The automatic start/stop system is auto- matically activated when you start the engine with the key. The indicator lamp in the automatic start/ stop system button lights up if the auto- matic start/stop system has been deacti- vated manually (Y page 119) or as the result of a malfunction. Driving 117

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Automatic start/stop function

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 128 · Applies to: 450, 451

General notes If the automatic start/stop system auto- matically switches off the engine, the è symbol is shown in the instrument cluster. This is the case if, among other things: Rthe indicator lamp in the automatic start/stop system button does not light up Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating tem- perature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle inte- rior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe tailgate is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driv- er's seat belt is fastened If not all conditions for automatic start/ stop system are fulfilled, the ç symbol is shown. i All of the vehicle's systems except the climate control remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. This is also the case if you exit the vehi- cle. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. i The è symbol flashes and a warning tone sounds if: Rthe automatic start/stop system switches the engine off automatically, and Ryou take off your seat belt, and Ryou open the driver's door Vehicles with a colour display: in addi- tion, the When exiting: remove key warning message appears. Vehicles with manual transmission The automatic start/stop system switches the engine off automatically if you stop the vehicle. X Brake the vehicle. X Engage neutral (Y page 121). X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off automati- cally. Vehicles with automatic transmission If the vehicle is stopped in transmission position D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. i This is also the case if you have man- ually activated the switch. Automatic engine start General notes The engine is started automatically if you: Ryou switch off the automatic start/stop system by pressing the automatic start/ stop system button Ryou open the tailgate Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- screen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low Vehicles with manual transmission ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. The engine is started automatically if you depress the clutch pedal. 118 Driving

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 129 · Applies to: 450, 451

The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brake pedal when in trans- mission position D or N Rrelease the brake pedal with manual transmission activated Rmove the transmission out of position P Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. Switching the automatic start/stop sys- tem on and off X To deactivate: press automatic start/ stop system button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. X To activate: press automatic start/stop system button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. i If indicator lamp : is on, the auto- matic start/stop system has been deac- tivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Driving 119

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 130 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Switch off the engine before attempting to start the engine again (Y page 133). X Try to start the engine again (Y page 115). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. The fuel gauge indi- cates empty. The fuel tank is empty. X Refuel the vehicle. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 228). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not run- ning smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. 120 Driving

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 131 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The coolant tempera- ture exceeds 110 †. The red coolant tem- perature warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. Vehicles with a col- our display: the Stop Switch off engine message appears. The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 210). Observe the warning notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 110 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Manual transmission Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. ! If you shift to 5th gear, you must ensure that the gear lever is firmly pushed to the right. Otherwise, you could shift unintentionally into 3rd gear and dam- age the transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the vehicle stationary on uphill gradi- ents. There is otherwise a risk of dam- aging the clutch. ! On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. 1 - 5 Forward gears k Reverse gear Shifting to neutral Manual transmission 121

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Depress the clutch pedal fully.

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 132 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Move the gearshift lever to position :. Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. All vehicles except for smart 66 kw Turbo X Engage neutral (Y page 121). X Press the gear lever to the right and then pull it back. smart 66 kw Turbo X Engage neutral (Y page 121). X Pull collar : upwards. X Press the gear lever to the right and then pull it back. i When reverse gear is selected, the auto- matic start/stop system is not available. The automatic start/stop system is not available until you drive faster than 10 km/h again. Additional information about the auto- matic start/stop system (Y page 117). Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. Vehicles with a monochrome display Vehicles with a colour display X Shift one gear up or down according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Further information on the transmission display: RVehicles with a monochrome display (Y page 151) RVehicles with a colour display (Y page 153) Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission posi- tion D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. 122 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When engaging transmission position D or

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 133 · Applies to: 450, 451

R, always firmly depress the brake pedal

and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to

neutral position N when you switch off the

engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is

a risk of an accident.

After switching off the engine, always

switch to parking position P. Prevent the

parked vehicle from rolling away by apply-

ing the parking brake.

Selector lever

j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear

i Neutral

h Drive

X To shift transmission position: press

release button : and shift the gear

lever to the desired transmission posi-

tion.

When you shift the transmission from posi-

tions N or P to position R, the ignition must

also be switched on.

i When you shift the transmission from

positions D or R to position N, you do not

need to press release button :.

Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display

The current transmission position and

drive program appear in the multifunction

display.

Transmission position display ; Transmission mode display Automatic transmission 123

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Transmission positions

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 134 · Applies to: 450, 451

B Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P (Y page 123) when the vehicle is stationary. The park- ing lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock. Informa- tion on manually disconnecting the selector lever lock (Y page 129). Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a quali- fied specialist workshop. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary. A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the parking brake and brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. If esp® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to posi- tion N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts 124 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Kickdown

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 135 · Applies to: 450, 451

If you want maximum acceleration, use kickdown: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Rocking the vehicle free Shifting back and forth between transmis- sion positions D and R can help to free up the vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. X Shift the selector lever alternately between positions D and R. The vehicle's engine management system limits the speed to a maximum of 9 km/h when shifting back and forth. Program selector button The program selector button allows you to choose between drive programs with dif- ferent driving characteristics. The automatic transmission switches to drive program E every time the engine is started. X Press program selector button : to change the drive program. The letter of the selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Standard Dynamic, agile driving More information on drive programs (Y page 125). Driving programs Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin Drive program S (standard) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. Ras a result of the later automatic trans- mission shift points, the fuel consump- tion possibly being higher. Manual gearshifting General notes You can shift the gears manually using either the selector lever or the gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in posi- tion D. Automatic transmission 125

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If it is permissible, the automatic trans-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 136 · Applies to: 450, 451

mission shifts to the next highest or next lowest gear. To use manual gearshifting, you have two possibilities: Rlong-term setting Rshort-term setting (vehicles with Sports package) If you activate the manual gearshift set- ting, the currently selected gear is shown in the multifunction display instead of D. Long-term setting X To activate: shift the selector lever to D. X Push the selector lever to the left. X To deactivate: push the selector lever to the right. Short-term setting (vehicles with Sports package) X To activate: shift the selector lever to D. X Pull gearshift paddle : or ;. The short-term setting remains active for a certain length of time. Under certain con- ditions this minimum time is increased, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or while driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull and hold gearshift paddle ;. or X Change the transmission position with the selector lever. or X Change the drive program with the pro- gram selector button. Shifting with the selector lever 126 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To shift up: push the selector lever in the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 137 · Applies to: 450, 451

q direction. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. The automatic transmission automati- cally shifts up in order to prevent dam- age to the engine: Rwhen the maximum engine speed of the currently engaged gear has been reached and Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. X To shift down: pull the selector lever in the ± direction. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Downshifting occurs automatically while coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Shifting with gearshift paddles (vehi- cles with Sports package) X To shift up: pull gearshift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. The automatic transmission automati- cally shifts up in order to prevent dam- age to the engine: Rwhen the maximum engine speed of the currently engaged gear has been reached and Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. X To shift down: pull gearshift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Downshifting occurs automatically while coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. Vehicles with a monochrome display Vehicles with a colour display Automatic transmission 127

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Shift one gear up or down according to

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 138 · Applies to: 450, 451

gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Further information on the transmission display: RVehicles with a monochrome display (Y page 151) RVehicles with a colour display (Y page 153) Kickdown If you want maximum acceleration, you can also change the kickdown to be manually switched on: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. i If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. 128 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the transmission

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 139 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability is deteriorat- ing. The transmission no longer shifts into all of the gears. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged. The transmission is in emergency mode. X Stop. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Manually releasing the selector lever lock You can manually release the selector level lock in the event of an electrical malfunc- tion. This is the case, for example, when you want to release the parking brake while towing away the vehicle and then apply it again. ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to prise out the cover from the centre con- sole. Otherwise, the cover or the centre console could be damaged. X Apply the parking brake. X Prise out cover : at lower edge ; with a flat, blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in cloth). X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up and simultaneously press release but- ton ? on the selector lever. X Shift the selector lever to N or P. Automatic transmission 129

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Refuelling

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 140 · Applies to: 450, 451

Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into con- tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thoroughly with clean water immedi- ately. Seek immediate medical atten- tion. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomit- ing. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before open- ing the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electro- static charge that may have built up. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electro- static charge could build up again. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com- pletely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on pain- ted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 261). Refuelling General notes The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you lock or unlock the vehicle with the key. The position of the fuel filler cap is dis- played 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. 130 Refuelling

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening the fuel filler flap

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 141 · Applies to: 450, 451

To open the fuel filler flap ; To attach the fuel filler cap = Fuel type instruction label X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Open the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Hang the fuel filler cap on the hook on the inside of the fuel filler flap. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Other- wise, fuel may leak out. Closing the fuel filler flap X Replace the fuel filler cap on the filler neck and turn it clockwise. X Close the fuel filler flap. i Close the fuel filler flap before lock- ing the vehicle. Refuelling 131

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 142 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. G WARNING There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 115). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 65). The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the key element in the emergency lock (Y page 70). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- rial can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be dam- aged. 132 Parking

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To ensure that the vehicle is secured

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 143 · Applies to: 450, 451

against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. Ra gear must be engaged on vehicles with manual transmission. Rthe selector lever must be in position P on vehicles with automatic transmis- sion. Rthe key must be removed from the igni- tion lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the kerb. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by apply- ing the parking brake. Vehicles with manual transmission X Select a gear. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X Apply the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission X Apply the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. Parking brake General notes G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the park- ing brake, the braking distance is consid- erably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. Parking 133

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To apply: firmly pull parking brake ;

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 144 · Applies to: 450, 451

upwards. The J indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up if the engine is running. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press release button : on parking brake ; and guide the parking brake down to the stop. The J indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out. The parking brake is not yet engaged if: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Release parking brake message appears in the multifunction display (vehicles with colour display) and Rthe J indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for lon- ger than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked up for lon- ger than six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driv- ing, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Do not switch off the ignition while driv- ing. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: RThe tyres should always be inflated to the recommended tyre pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RHave all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Service Booklet or by the service inter- val display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. eco score General notes The eco score display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteris- tics are. The eco score display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and pre- vailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. In addition to driving style, the consump- tion is affected by many other factors, such as: Rload Rtyre pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers 134 Driving tips

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

These factors are not included in the eco

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 145 · Applies to: 450, 451

score display. Vehicles with a monochrome display The percentage count in eco score dis- play : only appears after a distance of approx. 400 m has been covered. A higher percentage count indicates a more econom- ical driving style. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than 4 hours, eco score display : in the on-board computer will be automatically reset. i An economical driving style involves driving with a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value: Robserve the gearshift recommendation Raccelerate moderately, especially at higher speeds Rdrive carefully and keep your distance from the vehicle in front Rrelease the accelerator pedal in good time Rallow the vehicle to coast without the use of the brakes and engage neutral if necessary Rdrive at a constant speed and avoid unnecessary acceleration and decel- eration Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehicles with automatic transmis- sion). i The eco score calculation takes into account your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its com- pletion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the percentage count at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For dynamic changes, perform a manual reset (Y page 155). When the fuel level reaches the reserve range, the remaining fuel storage is shown in the multifunction display instead of the percentage value. For further information on the eco score display, see (Y page 155). Vehicles with a colour display Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmission The percentage count in the eco score dis- play only appears after a distance of approx. 400 m has been covered. A higher percentage count indicates a more econom- ical driving style. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than 4 hours, the eco score display in the on-board computer will be automatically reset. Driving tips 135

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicles with manual transmission: the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 146 · Applies to: 450, 451

percentage count in the eco score display is an average value based on the following three categories: Raccelerate (evaluation of all accelera- tion processes) - The bar fills up: moderate accelera- tion, especially at higher speeds - The bar empties: sporty acceleration Ranticipatory (assessment of driving behaviour at all times) - The bar fills up: keep your distance, release the accelerator early and allow the vehicle to coast without using the brakes. Maintain a constant speed and avoid unnecessary acceleration and deceleration. - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed, frequent braking Rshift (evaluation of all gear changes) - The bar fills up: observe the gearshift recommendations in the multifunction display. - The bar empties: driving with the engine speed too high or too low Vehicles with automatic transmission: the percentage count in the eco score display is an average value based on the following two categories: Raccelerate (evaluation of all accelera- tion processes) - The bar fills up: moderate accelera- tion, especially at higher speeds - The bar empties: sporty acceleration Ranticipatory (assessment of driving behaviour at all times) - The bar fills up: keep your distance, release the accelerator early and allow the vehicle to coast without using the brakes. Maintain a constant speed and avoid unnecessary acceleration and deceleration. - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed, frequent braking An economical driving style involves driv- ing with a moderate engine speed. Vehicles with manual transmission: to achieve a higher value in the shift cate- gory, observe the gearshift recommenda- tions. i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the bar for anticipatory will change. i The eco score calculation takes into account your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its com- pletion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the bars at the start of a jour- ney. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For dynamic changes, perform a manual reset (Y page 155). If you reset the data in the eco score dis- play, then the data in the from start trip computer is also reset automati- cally (Y page 154). For further information on the eco score display, see (Y page 155). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skid- ding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. 136 Driving tips

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i This also applies if you have activated

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 147 · Applies to: 450, 451

cruise control or the speed limiter. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to prevent the vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking dis- tance and could even cause the braking sys- tem to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driv- ing. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moder- ately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed, paying atten- tion to traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby dry- ing them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salt- treated roads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This can increase the braking dis- tance considerably. RBrake occasionally to remove any salt that may have started to build up. Ensure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehicle in front. New brake pads/linings New or replaced brake pads/linings and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced brak- ing effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. When having brake pads/linings fitted, smart recommends that for safety reasons you only use those which are approved for smart vehicles or are of an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for smart vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's oper- ating safety. Driving tips 137

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driving on wet roads

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 148 · Applies to: 450, 451

Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which aquaplaning can occur you must drive in the following man- ner: Rlower your speed Ravoid tyre ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maxi- mum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise dam- age the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe water level should not exceed the lower edge of the vehicle body in still water Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skid- ding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you have to leave the engine running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle free of snow. Open a window on the leeward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that pur- pose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. 138 Driving tips

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

For more information on driving with snow

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 149 · Applies to: 450, 451

chains, see (Y page 243).

For more information on driving with sum-

mer tyres, see (Y page 242).

Observe the notes in the "Winter opera-

tion" section (Y page 242).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road

speed for you. Cruise control does not

brake the vehicle automatically. Only the

engine's braking effect is available. In

order to reduce speed and maintain dis-

tance to other road users, you need to brake

yourself. This cancels cruise control.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic

conditions make it appropriate to main-

tain a steady speed for a prolonged period.

You can use cruise control at speeds above

30 km/h.

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style,

cruise control can neither reduce the risk

of an accident nor override the laws of

physics. Cruise control cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic condi-

tions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are

responsible for the distance to the vehicle

in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in

good time, and for staying in lane.

Do not use cruise control:

Rin road and traffic conditions which do

not allow you to maintain a constant

speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding

roads)

Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or

accelerating can cause the drive wheels

to lose traction and the vehicle could

then skid

Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to

fog, heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the

new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control buttons

Activates/deactivates cruise control ; Stores, increases or reduces the cur- rent speed = Calls up the last speed stored ? Interrupts cruise control Activating cruise control Cruise control must be activated before it can be used. X Press switch : (V). Cruise control is activated. The V symbol appears in the multi- function display. i When you switch off the engine, cruise control remains activated and the last speed stored is cleared. Storing and maintaining the current speed When cruise control is active, you can save the current speed starting from 30 km/h. Driving systems 139

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 150 · Applies to: 450, 451

speed. X Press switch ; (®) and release it. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. The stored speed appears beside the V icon in the multifunction dis- play. i Cruise control may be unable to main- tain the stored speed on uphill gradi- ents. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. On downhill gradients, only the engine's braking effect is available. You have to operate the brakes yourself to reduce speed. This cancels cruise control. Calling up the last speed stored G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and this dif- fers from your current speed, the vehicle will accelerate. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Before you call up the stored speed, pay attention to traffic conditions. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. X Press button = ° and release it. Cruise control is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Increasing or decreasing the speed In order to be able to increase or decrease the speed, a speed must already have been stored. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- ple, if you accelerate briefly to over- take, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. R®: increases the speed R−: decreases the speed X Press switch ; (®) or (−) repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. The speed is gradually increased or reduced. or X Press and hold switch ; (®) or (−) until the desired speed is reached. X Release the switch. The new speed is stored. Cancelling cruise control When cruise control is switched on, you can cancel cruise control at any time and call up the stored speed again later. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. X Press button ? ± and release it. or X Brake Cruise control is cancelled. Cruise control is also cancelled when: Ryou engage the parking brake Ryou depress the clutch Resp® intervenes Deactivating cruise control X Press switch : so that the switch is set to the middle position. Cruise control is deactivated. 140 Driving systems

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The V symbol goes out in the multi-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 151 · Applies to: 450, 451

function display.

i Once you have activated the limiter,

cruise control is deactivated.

Limiter

General notes

The limiter helps you to avoid exceeding a

set speed. The limiter does not brake the

vehicle automatically. On long and steep

downhill gradients, especially if the vehi-

cle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear

in time. By doing so, you will make use of

the braking effect of the engine. The lim-

iter may be unable to prevent the stored

speed from being exceeded on downhill

gradients. In this case, the stored speed

flashes in the display and a warning tone

sounds. Brake yourself, if necessary, to

avoid exceeding the speed.

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style, the

limiter can neither reduce the risk of an

accident nor override the laws of physics.

The limiter cannot take into account road,

weather or traffic conditions. The limiter

is only an aid. You are responsible for the

distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-

cle speed, for braking in good time, and for

staying in lane.

If there is a change of drivers, advise the

new driver of the speed stored.

Limiter buttons

Activates/deactivates the limiter ; Stores, increases or reduces the cur- rent speed = Calls up the last speed stored ? Cancels the limiter Activating the limiter The limiter must be activated before the speed limiter can be used. X Press (LIM) switch :. The limiter is activated. The È symbol appears in the multi- function display. i When you switch off the engine, the lim- iter remains activated and the last speed stored is cleared. Storing the speed When the limiter is active, you can store any speed starting from 30 km/h. You can save the current driving speed or you can set any desired speed while the vehicle is stationary. Saving the current driving speed X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Press switch ; (®) and release it. The limiter is activated. The stored speed appears beside the È icon in the multifunction display. Driving systems 141

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting a speed while the vehicle is sta-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 152 · Applies to: 450, 451

tionary X Press switch ; (®) and release it. The limiter is activated. The stored speed appears beside the È icon in the multifunction display. Calling up the last speed stored X Press button = (°) and release it. The limiter is activated. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Increasing or decreasing the speed In order to be able to increase or decrease the speed, a speed must already have been stored. R®: increases the speed R−: decreases the speed X Press switch ; (®) or (−) repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. The speed is then gradually increased or decreased. or X Press and hold switch ; (®) or (−) until the desired speed is reached. The speed will be increased or reduced in 10 km/h increments. X Release the switch. The new speed is stored. Exceeding the stored speed You can exceed the stored limit speed at any time, if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kick- down). When the maximum speed is excee- ded, the speed display flashes and a warn- ing tone sounds. The limiter is activated again once the speed drops below the stored speed and kickdown is no longer active. Cancelling the limiter When the limiter is activated, you can can- cel it at any time and call up the stored speed again later. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. X Press button ± ? and release it. The limiter is cancelled. Deactivating the limiter X Press the upper section of switch : so that the switch is set in the middle posi- tion. The limiter is deactivated. The È symbol goes out in the multi- function display. Parking aid General notes The rear parking aid indicates audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. If you engage reverse gear when the engine is running, the parking aid is acti- vated automatically. The parking aid monitors the rear area of your vehicle using three sensors : in the rear bumper. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors reg- ularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. 142 Driving systems

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When reverse gear is engaged the system

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 153 · Applies to: 450, 451

measures the distance between your vehi- cle and an object. If the proximity to the object behind the vehicle is less than 1.20 m, a beeping sound is issued. When the object is a maximum of 30 cm away, a con- tinuous tone is issued. Important safety notes The parking aid is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the imme- diate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no per- sons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. The parking aid does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause the parking aid to malfunction. The parking aid may not function cor- rectly on uneven terrain. The parking aid does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. over- hanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles Deactivating/activating the parking aid X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The system is deactivated. X Press button ; again. Indicator lamp : goes out. The system is reactivated. i The parking aid is automatically acti- vated when you start the engine. If you engage reverse gear while the engine is running, the parking aid is activated automatically. An acoustic signal sounds when reverse gear is selected. The parking aid is deactivated: Rwhen a speed of 10 km/h is exceeded Rreverse gear is no longer engaged Rear view camera General notes Reversing camera : is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area Driving systems 143

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

behind your vehicle with guide lines in the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 154 · Applies to: 450, 451

smart Media-System display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. i The text shown in the smart Media-Sys- tem display depends on the language set- ting. The following are examples of reversing camera displays. Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibil- ity for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the tailgate is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in tempera- ture, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified special- ist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). Activating/deactivating the reversing camera X To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that Reversing camera dis‐ play setting is selected in the smart Media-System (see separate operating instructions). X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the smart Media-System display. To switch off: after driving forwards briefly, the reversing camera will turn itself off. Messages in the display The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following loca- tions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tail- gate handle ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bot- tom-most guideline. 144 Driving systems

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

: Guide line without turning the steering

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 155 · Applies to: 450, 451

wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Green guide line at a distance of approximately 1.50 m from the rear of the vehicle = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 0.7 m from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.3 m from the rear of the vehi- cle A Blue guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) The guide lines are shown when the trans- mission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Lane Keeping Assist General notes This feature warns the driver if a lane marking is crossed inadvertently. Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera : which is affixed on the windscreen behind the rear view mirror. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. The corre- sponding symbol flashes for a maximum of five seconds in the display and a warning tone sounds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings. In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traf- fic situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or acceler- ate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic con- ditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. Driving systems 145

Driving and parking. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The system may be impaired or may not

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 156 · Applies to: 450, 451

function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traf- fic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam- aged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construc- tion area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade condi- tions on the road No warning occurs if: Ra lane marking is crossed at speed Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Vehicles with a colour display: X To switch on: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. In the dis- play, the à symbol and the Lane Keeping Assist on message appear. If you drive at speeds above 70 km/h and lane markings are detected, Lane Keep- ing Assist is operational. The à sym- bol appears in the display with a green background. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The à symbol in the display goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist off message appears in the display. Vehicles with a monochrome display X To switch on: press the ; button. Indicator lamp : goes out. The à symbol appears in the display. If you drive at speeds above 70 km/h and lane markings are detected, Lane Keep- ing Assist is operational. The ¤ sym- bol appears in the display. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The à symbol in the display goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. i Your selection remains stored when you switch off the engine. 146 Driving systems

Driving and parking. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ........................... 148

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 157 · Applies to: 450, 451

Important safety notes ...................... 148 Displays and operation ..................... 148 Menus and submenus ......................... 154 Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display) .................. 162 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) ......................... 167 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ........................... 184 147

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 158 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board com- puter. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The oper- ating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows display messages and/or warnings from certain systems in the display. You should there- fore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, you may cause an accident by driving a vehicle that is not operating reliably. If the operating safety of your vehicle impaired, park the vehicle as soon as pos- sible paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the notes in the overview of warn- ing and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster: ROn-board computer with a monochrome display (Y page 28) ROn-board computer with a colour display (Y page 30) Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting Instrument cluster lighting includes illu- mination of the instrument cluster, the additional instruments on the dashboard, the displays and the controls. The instrument cluster lighting is switched automatically between day and night lighting depending on the ambient light conditions (Y page 87). On vehicles with a colour display, you can also set the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting to different levels in the on-board computer (Y page 158). Speedometer If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster will briefly light up for a lamp test. During the lamp test, the illuminated speedometer needle moves in the speedometer. The on-board computer with a colour dis- play can show a digital speedometer in the display. The digital speedometer can be 148 Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

hidden/displayed and its speed unit

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 159 · Applies to: 450, 451

selected (Y page 159).

Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road

conditions when temperatures are around

the freezing point.

Bear in mind that the outside temperature

display indicates the temperature meas-

ured and does not record the road temper-

ature.

The display shows the outside temperature

on the far right in the header:

Rmonochrome display (Y page 151)

Rcolour display (Y page 153)

Changes in the outside temperature are

displayed after a short delay.

If the outside temperature has fallen below

3 †, the Ò symbol is shown beside the

outside temperature display.

At outside temperatures between -3 † and

3 †:

Rthe Ò symbol flashes for about

1 minute in the monochrome display and

then remains on continuously.

Rthe colour display also shows a display

message next to the Ò symbol

(Y page 173).

For an on-board computer with colour dis-

play, you can set the temperature unit of the

outside temperature display (Y page 160).

Fuel gauge

Fuel level indicator (example: monochrome dis-

play)

Fuel level indicator (example: colour display)

Reserve fuel display ; Fuel gauge = Fuel filler flap location indicator u The fuel filler cap is located on the right ? 6 Reserve fuel (yellow) Fuel gauge ; is shown in the display as a segment display with eight segments. When the fuel level falls below the reserve range of 5.0 l, the last illuminated segment of the fuel display will flash and a warning tone will sound. Reserve fuel display : will also appear. The reserve fuel display shows the numeric value of the remaining fuel level in 0.5 l increments. With a colour display: R6 symbol ? also appears in yellow Ra display message is also shown (Y page 175). Displays and operation 149

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Additional instruments on the dash-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 160 · Applies to: 450, 451

board

! Do not drive in the overrevving range.

Doing so will damage the engine.

H

Environmental note

Avoid excessive engine speeds. This

unnecessarily increases the fuel consump-

tion of your vehicle and harms the envi-

ronment as a result of increased emissions.

The overrevving range of the engine is

shown with dashed lines in the orange

marking of rev counter :. The fuel supply

is interrupted to protect the engine when

the overrevving range is reached.

Dashboard clock ; is synchronised with

the clock in the on-board computer.

Rev counter :, together with dashboard

clock ;, can be rotated approximately 60°

on the dashboard.

For vehicles with a colour display, you can

also set the brightness of the instrument

cluster lighting to different levels

(Y page 158).

On-board computer with a monochrome

display

Operating the on-board computer

Monochrome display ; Buttons on the multifunction lever X To activate the on-board computer: unlock the vehicle and open a door. If you do not subsequently lock the door, the on-board computer will remain active for approximately 15 minutes without any further activity. or X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the display and the settings in the on-board computer using buttons ; on the multifunction lever. 150 Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Buttons ; on the multifunction lever

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 161 · Applies to: 450, 451

´

Press briefly:

RTo scroll forward at menu level

RTo gradually increase the

value in the sub-menus

Press and hold:

RTo switch directly to the trip

meter at menu level

RTo quickly increase the value

in the sub-menus

a

Press briefly:

RTo confirm the setting in the

sub-menu

Press and hold:

RTo reset the value at menu level

or call up the sub-menu

Monochrome display

Vehicles with manual transmission

Time (Y page 152)

; Transmission display

u Gearshift recommendation

(Y page 122)

¿ Standard display

S Transmission malfunction

(Y page 164)

= ¤ Lane Keeping Assist indicator

lamp (Y page 145)

? Outside temperature display

(Y page 149)

A Trip meter (Y page 152)

Current fuel consumption (Y page 152)

Service display (Y page 211)

B Restarts the tyre pressure monitor

(Y page 246)

C 6 Fuel level (Y page 149)

D eco score display (Y page 134)

Reserve fuel display (Y page 149)

E b Brake lamp failure warning lamp

(Y page 162)

F Total distance recorder

G V Cruise control (Y page 139)

È Limiter

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Time (Y page 152) ; Drive program (Y page 123) = u Gearshift recommendation (Y page 122) ? Transmission display h Standard display or = Gear indicator (manual mode) S Transmission malfunction (Y page 164) A ¤ Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp (Y page 145) B Outside temperature display (Y page 149) C Trip meter (Y page 152) Current fuel consumption (Y page 152) Service display (Y page 211) D Restarts the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 246) E 6 Fuel level (Y page 149) Displays and operation 151

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

F eco score display (Y page 134)

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 162 · Applies to: 450, 451

Reserve fuel display (Y page 149) G b Brake lamp failure warning lamp (Y page 162) H Total distance recorder I V Cruise control (Y page 139) È Limiter Menus and multi-displays Overview The arrangement of the menus and displays can be envisaged as a circle. X To scroll: repeatedly press the ´ but- ton on the multifunction lever. The menu functions/displays are shown one after the other. i If the ´ button is pressed and held for approximately 3 seconds, the trip meter appears directly on the display. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call up the following menus/displays one after the other: Rdisplay and reset the trip meter (Y page 152) Rdisplay the current fuel consumption (Y page 152) Rdisplay the service due date (Y page 211) Rset the time menu (Y page 152) RRestarting the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 246) Resetting values You can reset the trip meter data and the eco score display (Y page 134). You can only reset the eco score if the display is show- ing the current fuel consumption. X Repeatedly press the ´ button on the multifunction lever until the display shows the trip meter data or the current fuel consumption. X Press and hold the b button on the multifunction lever. The trip meter value or the eco score display flashes for approx. 3 seconds. The data is then reset. The count in the eco score display only reappears once a distance of approx. 400 m has been covered. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the eco score display in the on- board computer will be automatically reset. X When the value has been reset, release the b button. If you release the b button earlier, the data shown will not change. Current fuel consumption When the vehicle is stationary or up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display shows the current fuel consumption as a numeric value in l/h. Setting the time X Repeatedly press the ´ button on the multifunction lever until the display shows the ° symbol alongside the time. X Press and hold the b button on the multifunction lever until the hour value flashes. X Press ´ to set the hour and confirm the selection with b. The minute value flashes. X Press ´ to set the minutes and b to confirm the selection. The display will show the time selected. i If the ´ button on the multifunction lever is pressed and held when setting the time, the numerical values will change continuously. 152 Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

On-board computer with a colour dis-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 163 · Applies to: 450, 451

play

Operating the on-board computer

Colour display

; Left control panel

X To activate the on-board computer:

unlock the vehicle and open a door.

If you do not subsequently lock the door,

the on-board computer will remain

active for approximately 15 minutes

without any further activity.

or

X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

lock.

You can control the display and the settings

in the on-board computer using the steer-

ing wheel buttons on left control panel ;.

Left control panel ;

9

:

Press briefly:

RTo scroll through a menu

RTo scroll through a sub-menu or

list

Press and hold:

RTo switch directly to the Dis‐

tance menu at menu level

RTo switch directly to the back

function at the submenu level

a

RTo confirm the selection

RIn certain menus, to switch to

the Reset values? function

RTo hide the display message

Colour display

Time (Y page 157) ; Ã Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp (Y page 145) = Digital speedometer (Y page 159) ? Outside temperature display (Y page 149) A Display field for display messages, menus and lists B 6 Reserve fuel display (Y page 149) C 6 Fuel level (Y page 149) D Transmission display Vehicles with manual transmission: ¿ Standard display Displays and operation 153

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 164 · Applies to: 450, 451

h Standard display with drive pro-

gram or = Gear indicator (manual

mode)

u Gearshift recommendation

(Y page 122)

S Transmission malfunction

(Y page 183)

E V Cruise control (Y page 139)

È Limiter

Menus and submenus

Menu overview

The arrangement of the menus and displays

can be envisaged as a circle.

At the menu level, a segment display is

shown on the right side of the display to

help navigation. The segment marked cor-

responds with the list position of the menu

in the following list. For long lists within

the menus and submenus, a scroll bar on the

right side of the display serves to assist

orientation.

Operating the on-board computer

(Y page 153).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you

can call up the following menus one after

the other:

RDistance menu (Y page 154)

Rfrom start trip computer menu

(Y page 154)

Rfrom reset trip computer menu

(Y page 154)

Reco score from start menu

(Y page 155)

RFuel consumption menu (Y page 156)

RCoolant temperature menu

(Y page 156)

RMessages and service menu

(Y page 156)

RSettings menu (Y page 157)

Odometer menu

Example: distance

X To show: press the 9 or : button on

the steering wheel to select the trip

meter display.

The display shows trip meter : and total

distance recorder ;.

X To reset the data: press the a button

on the steering wheel.

X Press the 9 or : button to select

yes and press the a button to confirm.

The trip meter is reset.

You can change the unit for the trip meter

in the Display submenu (Y page 159).

Trip computer menu "From start" or

"From reset"

Example: trip computer "From start"

Elapsed time ; Distance = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption X To display: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the from start or from reset trip computer menu. If you reset the data in the from start trip computer, the eco score display in the on- 154 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

board computer is also reset automatically

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 165 · Applies to: 450, 451

(Y page 155). Vehicles with a smart Media-System: if you reset the data in the from reset trip com- puter, the eco score display in the smart Media-System will also be reset automat- ically (see the separate operating instruc- tions). X To reset the data: press the a button on the steering wheel. X Press the 9 or : button to select yes and press the a button to confirm. The display shows the trip computer and the data shown is reset. The average speed and average fuel con- sumption are only displayed again once a distance of approx. 400 m has been cov- ered. The data in the from start trip computer menu refers to the start of the journey. The data in the from reset trip computer sub- menu refers to the last time the submenu was reset. The from start trip computer is automat- ically reset when: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than 4 hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The from reset trip computer is automat- ically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. The unit of distance for the journey, speed and consumption information can be changed in the Display submenu (Y page 159). eco score from start menu eco score display (vehicles with manual trans- mission) eco score display (vehicles with automatic transmission) X To display: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the eco score from start menu. If you reset the data in the eco score dis- play, then the data in the from start trip computer is also reset automatically (Y page 154). X To reset the data: press the a button on the steering wheel. X Press the 9 or : button to select yes and press the a button to confirm. The display shows the eco score display and the data shown is reset. The percentage count in the eco score display only reappears once a distance of approx. 400 m has been covered. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than 4 hours, the eco score display in the on-board computer will be automat- ically reset. For further information on the eco score display, see (Y page 134). Menus and submenus 155

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fuel consumption menu

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 166 · Applies to: 450, 451

Example: fuel consumption X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the display of current fuel consumption. The display shows the fuel consumption over the previous 15 minutes as a bar chart. The display additionally shows the current fuel consumption as a numeric value in the upper right section of the display. When the vehicle is stationary or up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display shows the current fuel consumption as a numeric value in l/h. If you have changed the unit of measurement for distance to Miles, the display shows two dashes. If you switch off the ignition, or change the distance unit, the fuel consumption data is deleted automatically. You can change the distance unit in the Display submenu (Y page 159). Coolant temperature menu Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the cool- ant temperature may rise to 110 †. Example: coolant temperature X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the coolant tem- perature display. The display shows the current coolant temperature as a bar in the range between 50 and 110 †. If the coolant temperature rises above 110 †, then the display shows a display message (Y page 175). Observe the dis- play message. You could otherwise dam- age the engine. You can change the temperature unit in the Display submenu (Y page 160). Messages and service menu Example: messages and service If you have hidden display messages these are saved in the message memory. The menu shows the number of display messages in message memory : and next service due date ; (Y page 211). The message memory can only be called up when the ignition is switched on. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Messages and service menu. The display shows the number of display messages in the message memory and the next service due date. If there are no display messages, then the value in brackets is 0 and the informa- tion on the a button is hidden. X To show display messages: press the a button on the steering wheel. The lower area on the right of the display shows the display message, its list num- 156 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ber and then number of display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 167 · Applies to: 450, 451

in the message memory. X Press 9 to scroll through the display messages in the message memory. Pressing : only allows you to scroll back to messages which have already been read. If you scroll back from the first display message using :, the Messages and service menu will again be shown in the display. Existing display messages are not shown. Settings menu Introduction In the Settings menu, as well as in its sub- menus, a navigation bar is also shown at the top of the display field. The navigation bar serves for quick orientation and shows the navigation path to the current selection shown in the display (submenu/function). The selection shown in the display is high- lighted in the navigation path. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call up the following submenus in the Settings menu: RTime submenu (Y page 157) For vehicles with a smart media system, the time is set using the smart media system. - Setting the time and the time format (12/24 h) RDisplay submenu (Y page 158) - Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting - Shows and sets the digital speedometer - Setting the units for distance and tem- perature RAmbient lighting submenu (Y page 160) - Setting and switching the ambient lighting on/off RTyre pressure monitor submenu - Restarts the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 246) RLanguage (Language) submenu (Y page 160) - Setting the menu language The Settings menu and some submenus also show the back function. If the back function is shown, you have to select the function to leave the menu. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the back func- tion and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. You quit the menu and the display shows the next higher menu level. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Time submenu Introduction This submenu is not available on vehicles with a smart media system. You set the time using the smart media system. The Time submenu offers the following options: Rsetting the time Rsetting the time format (12/24 h) Menus and submenus 157

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To leave the submenu: press the 9

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 168 · Applies to: 450, 451

or : button on the steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. The display shows the Settings menu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Setting the time X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Time submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Set the time and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to set the hour and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to set the minutes and confirm with a. The time is set and the display shows the Time submenu. i If you are setting the time and keep the 9 or : button depressed, then the numerical value changes continuously. Setting the time format (12/24 h) X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Time submenu and confirm with a. X Press 9 or : to select Time for‐ mat (12/24 h) and confirm with a. X Press 9 or : to select the desired time format 24 hour or 12 hour (am/pm) and confirm with a. The time format is accepted and the dis- play shows the Time submenu. Display submenu Introduction In the Display submenu, you can call up the following submenus: RDisplay/switch brightness submenu (Y page 158) - Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting RDigital speedometer submenu, see (Y page 159) - Shows and sets the digital speedometer RUnits of distance submenu (Y page 159) - Setting the units of distance RUnits of temperature submenu (Y page 160) - Setting the units of temperature X To leave the submenu: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. The display shows the Settings menu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting Instrument cluster lighting includes illu- mination of the instrument cluster, the additional instruments on the dashboard, the displays and the controls. You can set the brightness of the instru- ment cluster to different levels with the Display/switch brightness function. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Display/switch brightness and press the a button to confirm. 158 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Press the 9 or : button to set the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 169 · Applies to: 450, 451

brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to dimmed instrument lighting and level 5 to bright instrument lighting. With the selection during night-time driving, the instrument cluster bright- ness level is set at the same time. X Press the a button to confirm the set- ting. The instrument lighting is set and the display shows the Display submenu. Digital speedometer submenu In the Digital speedometer submenu you have the following options: Rshowing/hiding the digital speedometer Rsetting the unit for speed in the digital speedometer X To call up the submenu: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Digital speedometer submenu and confirm with a. X To show/hide the digital speedometer: press the 9 or : button to select the On function. X Activate or deactivate the On function by pressing the a button. When the function is highlighted, it is activated and the display shows the dig- ital speedometer (Y page 153). X To set the unit of speed: press the 9 or : button to select Unit and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the unit of speed km/h or mph and confirm with a. The display shows the Digital speed‐ ometer submenu. X To leave the submenu: press the 9 or : button to select the back func- tion and confirm with a. The display shows the Display submenu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Setting the unit of measurement for dis- tance If you change the unit of measurement for distance, the values in the: Rtrip computer "From start" or "From reset" (Y page 154) Reco score from start (Y page 155) Rfuel consumption (Y page 156) menus are also reset automatically. You can only set the unit of measurement for distance when the vehicle is stationary. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Units of distance and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Kilometres or Miles as the unit of meas- urement for distance and press a to confirm. The display shows the Display submenu. The selected unit of measurement for dis- tance applies as the basis for: Rthe trip computer Rthe service display Rthe fuel consumption display Rthe total distance recorder and the trip meter display Rthe speed display for cruise control and the limiter Menus and submenus 159

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting the temperature unit

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 170 · Applies to: 450, 451

You can switch the display of the outside temperature and the coolant temperature between † and ‡. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Display submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select Units of temperature and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the unit of temperature °C or °F and con- firm with a. The display shows the Display submenu. Ambient lighting submenu Introduction In the Ambient lighting submenu you have the following options: Rswitching the ambient lighting on/off Rsetting the brightness of the ambient lighting to different levels X To leave the submenu: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. The display shows the Settings menu. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Switching the ambient lighting on/off X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Ambient lighting submenu and con- firm by pressing the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select the On function. X Activate or deactivate the On function by pressing the a button. When the function is highlighted it is activated and the ambient lighting is switched on. Setting the brightness You can set the brightness of the ambient lighting to different levels. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Ambient lighting submenu and con- firm by pressing the a button. You will see the selected setting. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brightness and press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to set the brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to dimmed ambient lighting and level 5 to bright ambient lighting. With the selection, the ambient lighting brightness level is set at the same time. X Press the a button to save the setting. The brightness of the ambient lighting is set and the display shows the Ambient lighting submenu. Language submenu X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Use 9 or : to select the Language (Language) submenu and confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired language for the displays and messages and confirm with a. 160 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Press the 9 or : button on the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 171 · Applies to: 450, 451

steering wheel to select the back func- tion and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. The display shows the Settings menu in the selected language. i If you press and hold 9 or :, you change directly to the back function. Menus and submenus 161

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 172 · Applies to: 450, 451

Introduction Warnings, malfunctions or additional information are shown in the monochrome display as symbols. For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. The cause of a display message should be remedied as soon as possible. Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The symbol lights up. The brake lights are not functioning. The actuation or the bulbs or LEDs are faulty. G WARNING Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. The brake lamps are not functioning and are no longer working when braking. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. A Vehicles with manual transmission only: letter N flashes in the middle of the display. You are trying to start the engine, a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is not fully depressed. To start the engine: X Engage neutral. (Y page 121) or X Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the engine fails to start despite the clutch pedal being fully depressed, then the clutch sensor is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 162 Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 173 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: the letter N flashes in the middle of the display if you try to shift to P. A warning tone also sounds. The parking lock is malfunctioning. X Apply the parking brake to park. AorB Vehicles with automatic transmission only: P or N flash alter- nately in the middle of the display. You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position D or R. X Shift to P or N to start. Aor7/ C Vehicles with automatic transmission only: N flashes alter- nately with the currently selected transmission position in the middle of the display. The engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion. X Shift to N to start. ì Vehicles with automatic transmission only: B flashes for 15 seconds in the middle of the display. You have tried to start the engine in transmission position N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Bor7/ C,A Vehicles with automatic transmission only: P flashes alter- nately with the currently selected transmission position. A warning tone also sounds. The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the gear lever is in position R, N or D. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Fully close the driver's door. Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display) 163

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 174 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions S Vehicles with manual transmission only: the transmission display shows three lines. The transmission electronics are malfunctioning or the neu- tral gate switch is faulty. The Start/Stop function and cruise control are deactivated automatically. Starting the engine is only possible with the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. S Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the transmission display shows three lines. The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. SorB/ 7/C/ A Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S flashes alternately with the currently selected transmission position. The automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will feel the clutch pedal pulsate. X Initially try to avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres. If the display message disappears, automatic transmission is available again. SorB/ 7/C/ A Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: S flashes alternately with the currently selected transmission position. A warning tone also sounds. Further pulling away or crawling manoeuvres have led to a critical clutch temperature. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message does not reappear after acknowledging it. 164 Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 175 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¤ The symbol flashes for a maximum of 5 seconds and in addition a warning tone sounds. Lane Keeping Assist warning You are crossing a detected outer lane marking without indi- cating. X Remain in lane, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. or X Indicate to change lane. Ã The symbol flashes for about 3 seconds and in addition a warn- ing tone sounds. The symbol is then hidden. Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning and deactivated. Pos- sible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe system electronics are faulty. Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when the causes mentioned above no longer apply. If the windscreen is dirty: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Clean the outside of the windscreen (Y page 214). If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed above do not apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ° h The symbols flash for about 5 seconds. The symbols then both remain lit. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted (Y page 246). È The symbol lights up without the speed display. The limiter has been activated without a speed being entered or has been cancelled. X Set a limit speed . Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display) 165

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 176 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions È The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A warning tone also sounds. The limiter is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. È The symbol lights up and the speed display flashes. A warning tone also sounds. The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed. X If required, brake the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions. V The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A warning tone also sounds. In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. ÷, light up. The central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func- tion of the key. Ryou can no longer start the engine X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. V The symbol lights up without the speed display. Cruise control has been activated without a speed being entered or has been cancelled. X Set a speed (Y page 139). 166 Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 177 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions V The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A warning tone also sounds. Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivated automati- cally. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Ò The outside temperature has fallen to 3 † or lower. The symbol flashes for about 1 minute. The road surface may be icy. If the outside temperature falls to a level under -3 †, the symbol does not flash but rather remains on continuously. X Observe the information on the outside temperature display (Y page 149). X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather con- ditions. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) Introduction Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. The display shows high-priority messages in red. For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. You can use the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to hide low-priority messages. The display messages are stored in the message memory and can be called up as for as long as the ignition remains switched on (Y page 156). When the ignition is turned off, the message memory is deleted and no display messages are stored. The cause of a display message should be remedied as soon as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 167

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Safety systems

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 178 · Applies to: 450, 451

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 Malfunction Visit workshop The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unin- tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig- gered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38). Electronics mal‐ function Stop See Owner's Manual In addition, the ÷, ! and J warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. abs (Anti-lock Brake System) and esp® (Electronic Stability Program) are malfunctioning. This means that crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking sit- uation can increase. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Release parking brake You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. 168 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 179 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Brake force distri‐ bution inoperative Stop See Owner's Manual In addition, the J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. EBD is malfunctioning. This means that abs, esp®, crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking sit- uation can increase. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the mal- function. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 169

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 180 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! System inoperative abs is malfunctioning. This means that esp®, crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking sit- uation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the abs control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems may be unavailable. 170 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 181 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ System inoperative ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. This means that crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer working when braking. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Check that the brake lamps are working. If the brake lamps are not working: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake lamps are working: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Hill start assist inoperative The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- ter. Hill start assist is malfunctioning. If you release the brake, your vehicle will not be held automatically when pulling away uphill and may roll away immediately. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 171

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 182 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ^ Distance warning inoperative The distance warning function is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty. Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display mes- sage goes out. The distance warning function is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Clean the smart logo in the radiator trim (Y page 215). X Restart the engine. 172 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 183 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ^ Electronics mal‐ function Visit workshop The distance warning function is malfunctioning or tempora- rily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty. Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warn- ing function is operational again. If the display message continues to light up, the electronics of the distance warning function are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Ò Black ice warning The outside temperature has fallen to 3 † or lower. The road surface may be icy. If the outside temperature sinks below -3 †, the colour display only shows the Ò symbol beside the outside temperature display. X Observe the information on the outside temperature display (Y page 149). X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather con- ditions. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; Reduced power See Owner's Manual The engine is running in emergency mode. For example, the fuel injection may be faulty. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. í Malfunction Visit workshop The battery monitoring is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 173

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 184 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions í Stop See Owner's Manual The battery is not being charged. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator Rtorn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over- heat. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 5 Stop Switch off engine The oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Check the oil level (Y page 207). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 207). Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. 174 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 185 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? Stop Switch off engine The coolant temperature has exceeded 110 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be dam- aged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the notes as you do so (Y page 264). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 110 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. 6 Low fuel level The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 175

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driving systems

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 186 · Applies to: 450, 451

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions à Lane Keeping Assist inoperative The à symbol in the top bar of the display also flashes white for approximately 3 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is then hidden. Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning and deactivated. Pos- sible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe system electronics are faulty. Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when the causes mentioned above no longer apply. If the windscreen is dirty: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Clean the outside of the windscreen (Y page 214). If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed above do not apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. à The symbol in the top bar of the display flashes green for a maximum of 5 seconds and a warning tone sounds. Lane Keeping Assist warning You are crossing a detected outer lane marking without indi- cating. X Remain in lane, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. or X Indicate to change lane. For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 145). È Limiter inopera‐ tive The È symbol in the display footer also flashes for approx- imately 10 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is then hidden. The limiter is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 176 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 187 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions È The symbol in the footer of the display is lit and the speed display flashes. A warning tone also sounds. The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed. X If required, brake the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions. È The symbol in the footer of the display is lit without a speed display. The limiter has been activated without a speed being entered or has been cancelled. X Set a limit speed . V Cruise control inoperative The V symbol in the display footer also flashes for approx- imately 10 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is then hidden. Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivated automati- cally. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. V The symbol in the footer of the display is lit without a speed display. Cruise control has been activated without a speed being entered or has been cancelled. X Set a speed (Y page 139). Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 177

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tyres

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 188 · Applies to: 450, 451

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Tyre pressure Cau‐ tion tyre malfunc‐ tion The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 221). h Tyre pressure mon‐ itor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restar- ted after a wheel change. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor after a wheel change (Y page 246) The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 178 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 189 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Tyre pressure mon‐ itor inoperative wheel sensors miss‐ ing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or sev- eral wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor was not restarted after a wheel change. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. or X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. or X Restart the tyre pressure monitor after a wheel change (Y page 246) The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. h Correct tyre pres‐ sure The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 245). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 246). Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 179

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 190 · Applies to: 450, 451

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b Brake lamps inoper‐ ative The brake lights are not functioning. The actuation or the bulbs/LEDs are faulty. G WARNING Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. The brake lamps are not functioning and are no longer working when braking. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle from rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Switch off lights The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to à or $. \ (Example of all doors and tailgate open) A door or the tailgate is open. A warning tone also sounds. The display shows the open doors/tailgate. X Pull over paying attention to road and traffic conditions and stop the vehicle, then close the doors and tailgate. D Steering malfunc‐ tion See Owner's Manual The power steering assistance is faulty. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a quali- fied specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. D Electronics mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual The power steering assistance may be malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer. X Drive on carefully to a qualified specialist workshop and have the steering checked immediately. ç Malfunction See Owner's Manual The automatic Start/Stop function is malfunctioning and will be switched off. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 180 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 191 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions è When exiting: remove key The vehicle is in automatic engine stop. You have opened the driver's door or released the seat belt and the key is in the ignition lock. X The engine will not start automatically. X Please take note of the conditions for the automatic engine stop/engine start (Y page 118). è Depress clutch to start engine Vehicles with manual transmission only: you have stalled the engine when pulling away or when stopping. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. The engine starts automatically. è Engage neutral to start engine Vehicles with manual transmission only: you have stalled the engine when pulling away or when stopping and the clutch sen- sor is inoperative. X Engage neutral (Y page 121). The engine starts automatically. To start engine: shift to neutral or depress clutch Vehicles with manual transmission only: you are trying to start the engine, a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is not fully depressed. To start the engine: X Engage neutral. (Y page 121) or X Depress the clutch pedal fully. To start engine: shift to neutral Vehicles with manual transmission only: the clutch sensor is malfunctioning. You are trying to start the engine, a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is fully depressed. X To start the engine, engage neutral. (Y page 121) X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. A Parking brake mal‐ function Apply parking brake to park Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: the letter N flashes in the middle of the display if you try to shift to P. A warning tone also sounds. The parking lock is malfunctioning. X Apply the parking brake to park. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 181

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 192 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to P or N to start Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the display. You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position D or R. X Shift to P or N to start. Shift to N to start. Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the display. The engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion. X Shift to N to start. A Apply brakes to start Vehicles with automatic transmission only: N is shown in the middle of the display. You have tried to start the engine in transmission position N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Risk of vehicle rolling Transmis‐ sion not in P Vehicles with automatic transmission only: a warning tone also sounds. The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the gear lever is in position R, N or D. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Fully close the driver's door. S Transmission mal‐ function Visit workshop Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S is shown. The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. SorB/ 7/C/ A Clutch protection active See Owner's Manual Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S flashes alternately with the currently selected transmission position. The automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will feel the clutch pedal pulsate. X Initially try to avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres. If the display message disappears, automatic transmission is available again. 182 Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Display messages

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 193 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions SorB/ 7/C/ A Transmission over‐ heated See Owner's Manual Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: S flashes alternately with the currently selected transmission position. A warning tone also sounds. Further pulling away or crawling manoeuvres have led to a critical clutch temperature. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message does not reappear after acknowledging it. Electronics mal‐ function Visit workshop In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. ÷, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func- tion of the key. Ryou can no longer start the engine X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Electronics mal‐ function Visit workshop The transmission electronics are malfunctioning or the neu- tral gate switch is faulty. The Start/Stop function and cruise control are deactivated automatically. Starting the engine is only possible with the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rain/light sensor inoperative The rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. Automatic headlamp mode and automatic intermittent wipe are not available. X Switch on exterior lighting manually if required (Y page 87). X Switch the windscreen wipers on or off manually as required (Y page 95). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages (on-board computer with colour display) 183

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 194 · Applies to: 450, 451

Safety Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü Only for certain coun- tries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec- onds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. An additional warning tone will sound if the driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40). The warning tone ceases. ü After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40). The warning lamp goes out. ü The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, you are driving faster than 20 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 20 km/h. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40). The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. 184 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Safety systems

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 195 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The red restraint sys- tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unin- tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig- gered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38). J ÷ ! The red brake system warning lamp, the yel- low esp® warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp light up while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and esp® (Electronic Stability Program) are malfunctioning. This means that crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking sit- uation can increase. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 185

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 196 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, esp®, crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking sit- uation can increase. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 186 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 197 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warn- ing lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. This means that esp®, crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking sit- uation can increase. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems may be unavailable. ÷ The yellow esp® warn- ing lamp is on when you are driving. In addition, the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. h, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func- tion of the key. Ryou can no longer start the engine X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ The yellow esp® warn- ing lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. esp® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control is automatically deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather con- ditions. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 187

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 198 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ The yellow esp® warn- ing lamp is lit while the engine is running. esp® is not available due to a malfunction. This means that crosswind assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer working when braking. If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Check that the brake lamps are working. If the brake lamps are not working: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake lamps are working: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ^ The yellow distance warning function warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. ÷, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func- tion of the key. Ryou can no longer start the engine X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 188 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 199 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ^ The yellow distance warning function warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. The distance warning function is malfunctioning or tempora- rily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty. Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warn- ing function is operational again. If the distance warning lamp continues to light up, the dis- tance warning function electronics are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. · The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warn- ing tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on the distance warning function (Y page 60). · The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. X Increase the distance. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 189

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 200 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp flashes while the engine is running. The ignition system is malfunctioning. The engine is misfir- ing, for example, which means the catalytic converter could become damaged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ; The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The engine power out- put is also reduced. The engine is running in emergency mode. This may lead to a malfunctioning of the fuel injection system, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ; The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a fault, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the exhaust system Rin the fuel system Rwith the accelerator pedal sensor X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. í The red battery warn- ing lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The battery is not being charged. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator Rthe battery is faulty Rtorn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over- heat. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 190 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 201 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 5 The red oil pressure indicator lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The engine oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Check the oil level (Y page 207). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 207). Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ? The red coolant tem- perature warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 110 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be dam- aged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the notes as you do so (Y page 264). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 110 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 191

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tyres

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 202 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h You are driving and the yellow tyre pres- sure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning lamps, e.g. ÷, light up. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func- tion of the key. Ryou can no longer start the engine X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. h You are driving and the yellow tyre pres- sure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. A warning tone also sounds. The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 221). 192 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 203 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The yellow tyre pres- sure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or sev- eral wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor was not restarted after a wheel change. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. or X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. or X Restart the tyre pressure monitor after a wheel change (Y page 246) The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. If the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp continues to remain on: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. h You are driving and the yellow tyre pres- sure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 245). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 246). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 193

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 204 · Applies to: 450, 451

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions \ The red door warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. In addition, further warning lamps light up, such as ÷. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After the engine is switched off: Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control func- tion of the key. Ryou can no longer start the engine X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. \ The red door warning lamp is on. A door or the tailgate is open. If you are driving at speeds above 20 km/h, an additional warning tone will sound. X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Close all doors and the tailgate. D The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering assistance is faulty. G WARNING You may need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional dis- play messages. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a quali- fied specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. 194 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 205 · Applies to: 450, 451

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ç The yellow automatic Start/Stop function warning lamp is lit when the vehicle is stationary and while it is moving. The automatic Start/Stop function is malfunctioning and will be switched off. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ç The yellow automatic Start/Stop function warning lamp only lights up when the vehicle is stationary. Not all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off have been met. X Please take note of the conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 118). è The green automatic start/stop system indicator lamp starts flashing when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is run- ning. Vehicles with manual transmission only: the vehicle is at a standstill. No stop preventers are active. The clutch pedal is fully depressed. The engine is not switched off automatically. The flashing indicator lamp is intended to remind you to activate the start/ stop function in order to save fuel. X Shift to neutral and slowly release the clutch pedal. (Y page 121). The engine is switched off automatically. è The green automatic Start/Stop function indicator lamp flashes during the automatic engine switch-off. A warning tone also sounds. The vehicle is in automatic engine stop. The driver's door has been opened or the seatbelt removed while the ignition is switched on. The engine will not start automatically. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal completely. Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the brake. The engine starts automatically. è The green automatic start/stop system indicator lamp starts flashing and the engine is switched off. Vehicles with manual transmission only: you have stalled the engine when pulling away or when stopping. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. The engine starts automatically. If the engine does not start automatically: X Engage neutral (Y page 121). The engine starts automatically. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 195

On-board computer and displays. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 206 · Applies to: 450, 451

196 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ........................... 198

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 207 · Applies to: 450, 451

Stowage areas .................................. 198 Features ........................................ 202 197

Stowing and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 208 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. Your vehicle has not been approved by the manufacturer for towing a trailer. A trailer could seriously impair driving safety. Mounting a basic rack, a cycle rack or a ski/ snowboard rack on the rear of the vehicle will change the axle load distribution as specified by the vehicle manufacturer. Read the operating instructions for the individual accessories. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants) Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the head restraints Rensure that no items of luggage can enter the vehicle interior above or between the front seats Rensure that loaded objects are stowed safely and are secured Rload heavy objects at the bottom and light objects at the top Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. There is a risk of injury, especially in the case of heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situa- tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- ments or ruffled pockets. 198 Stowage areas

Stowing and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RClose closable stowage compartments

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 209 · Applies to: 450, 451

while driving.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged or fragile objects

behind the last bench seat or under the

passenger seats.

Observe the loading guidelines

(Y page 198).

Glove compartment

Illustration of a closed glove compartment

X To open: pull handle :.

The closed glove compartment can be

locked with the key.

X To lock: insert the key into the lock and

turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.

X To unlock: insert the key into the lock

and turn it 90° anti-clockwise to posi-

tion 1.

Stowage compartment in the doors

The stowage compartments are located in

the driver's door and front-passenger

door.

Stowage compartment Bottles can be stowed in the doors. Drawer in the centre console X Pull drawer ; by handle : in the direc- tion of the arrow. Stowage compartment in the tailgate The stowage compartment in the tailgate offers additional stowage space for small objects. You can keep the fluorescent jacket, first-aid kit and warning triangle here, for example. Stowage areas 199

Stowing and features. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To open: open the tailgate.

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 210 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Pull back handle : on the inside of the tailgate. X Fold the lid of the stowage compartment forwards in the direction of the arrow. X To close: fold the lid of the stowage com- partment back in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Press the cover firmly closed in the mid- dle until it engages audibly. Boot cover Important safety notes G WARNING On its own, the boot cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the boot cover. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 198). The boot cover: Rconceals objects in the vehicle's boot Rprevents smaller objects from slipping from the boot into the vehicle interior, but will not restrain loads in the event of an accident The luggage net bag: Rserves to hold small, light objects Rprevents smaller objects from slipping within the vehicle interior Fitting If you use the boot cover under normal cir- cumstances, install it in brackets ;. If you do not need to use the boot cover, install it in brackets =. X For easier fitting, fold the front- passenger seat backrests forwards (Y page 80). X Open the upper and lower tailgate (Y page 71). X Hold boot cover : in the boot with the luggage net bag at the front. X Insert the boot cover into upper bracket ; or into lower bracket = on the right-hand side. i Lower bracket = can only be used if there is no subwoofer fitted. 200 Stowage areas

Stowing and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Slide handle ? to the right in the direc-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 211 · Applies to: 450, 451

tion of the arrow. X Insert the boot cover into bracket ; or = on the left side panelling and release the handle. Boot cover : snaps into place. X Pull luggage net bag A down slightly and secure with the Velcro fasteners. To remove, follow the sequence in reverse. Installing and removing the boot cover X To install: grip boot cover : in the middle and pull it back. X Hook boot cover : into left and right rear brackets B and release. X To remove: grip boot cover : in the middle, pull it back and unhook it from rear brackets B. X Slide boot cover : back. Fitting/removing the subwoofer X To fit: insert connector :. X Place subwoofer ; on the side trim. X Slide subwoofer ; to bracket =. X Slide the subwoofer up in the direction of the arrow on bracket =. Stowage areas 201

Stowing and features. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Then slide the subwoofer over bracket =

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 212 · Applies to: 450, 451

in the direction of the arrow until the

subwoofer slides down.

X Close quick-release fastener ?.

X To remove: release quick-release fas-

tener ?.

X Slide the subwoofer up over bracket =

and remove.

X Disconnect plug :.

X Take out subwoofer :.

Features

Cup holders

Important safety notes

G WARNING

The cup holder cannot secure a drinks con-

tainer in place during a journey. If you use

a cup holder during a journey, the drinks

container could be flung around and liquid

could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could

come into contact with the liquid and, in

particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You

could be distracted from the traffic situa-

tion and lose control of the vehicle. There

is a risk of an accident and injury.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is

stationary. Only place containers of a suit-

able size in the cup holder. Seal the con-

tainer, in particular when it contains hot

liquid.

G WARNING

If you do not correctly store objects in the

vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung

around, thus striking vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, especially when

braking or abruptly changing directions.

RAlways store objects so that they cannot

be flung around in these or in similar

situations.

RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage compartments, lug-

gage nets or stowage nets.

RClose lockable stowage compartments

while driving.

RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too

large in the luggage compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers

of the right size and which have lids. The

drinks could otherwise spill.

Observe the loading guidelines

(Y page 198).

Cup holder in the front centre console

Cup holders 202 Features

Stowing and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cup holder in the centre console

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 213 · Applies to: 450, 451

Cup holders

The cup holder has a recess for storing

selected mobile phones.

Sun visors

Overview

Mirror cover ; Bracket = Retaining strap ? Vanity mirror Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. X Pull the sun visor out of bracket ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. Ashtray ! The cup holder in the centre console is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder. Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall into the cup holder. Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam- aged. X To open: lift up cover :. X To close: push down cover :. X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out. X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup holder. i If you remove the ashtray, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. Cigarette lighter Important safety notes G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga- rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Features 203

Stowing and features. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your attention must always be focused on

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 214 · Applies to: 450, 451

the traffic conditions. Only use the ciga- rette lighter when road and traffic condi- tions permit. X Press in cigarette lighter :. Cigarette lighter : will pop out auto- matically when the heating element is red-hot. 12 V sockets General notes X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 120 W (10 A). Example accessories include mobile phone charg- ers. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. Socket in the front centre console X Lift up the cover of socket :. Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. X Slide the driver's seat backwards. X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain- ers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat from retain- ers ;. X Remove the floormat. 204 Features

Stowing and features. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ..........................

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 215 · Applies to: 450, 451

206 Checking service products ................. 206 Service .......................................... 211 Care .............................................. 212 205

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 216 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Checking service products Engine compartment (rear) Engine compartment cover G WARNING The engine compartment cover can become very hot. There is a risk of injury if you remove the engine compartment cover to work in the engine compartment. Allow the engine to cool down before remov- ing the engine compartment cover. X To open: apply the parking brake. X Select a gear. X Switch the ignition off. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Open the upper and lower tailgate (Y page 71). X For vehicles with the subwoofer: remove the subwoofer (Y page 206). X Remove luggage compartment cover : if necessary (Y page 200). X Hold the carpet on the right and left sides and fold upwards. X Remove the carpet from the vehicle. X Vehicles with a boot cover: attach the hook to upper bracket of boot cover : (Y page 200). X Unscrew screws = from engine compart- ment cover ; manually. X Remove engine compartment cover ;. X To close: slide engine compartment cover ; forward as far as it will go. X Retighten screws = manually. X Vehicles with a boot cover: unhook the hooks. X Put the carpet back into the vehicle. X Fold down the carpet and push it under the side panelling. X For vehicles with the subwoofer: fit the subwoofer again (Y page 206). X Close the tailgate. Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehi- cle consumes up to 0.5 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately 5 minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the meas- urement. 206 Checking service products

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 217 · Applies to: 450, 451

stick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components descri- bed in the following. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking ser- vice products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bon- net closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may con- tinue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas sur- rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. X Open the engine compartment cover (Y page 206). Example X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dip- stick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components descri- bed in the following. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the compo- nents that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. Checking service products 207

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Environmental note

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 218 · Applies to: 450, 451

H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or water- ways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic con- verter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. You will find further information on engine oils you can use in the "Technical data" section (Y page 263). X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up once with a maximum of 1 l engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 207). Front compartment Service cover Important safety notes G WARNING If the service cover is not locked, it may come loose during driving and block your view or endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, make sure that the service cover is locked before driving off. G WARNING If the windscreen wipers start to move when the service cover is open, you could become caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before you open the ser- vice cover. ! To ensure unhindered air intake, com- pletely remove any dirt or snow from the ventilation slots above the service cover. To prevent it from becoming damaged or dirty, the service cover can be removed and hung on the front of the vehicle. The service cover is attached to the rear side of the vehicle body with a strap. X Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface. X Apply the parking brake. X Select a gear. X Switch the ignition off. Removing Vehicles with a lockable service cover: X To unlock: remove lock cover : (driver's side only) with the key. X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position u. 208 Checking service products

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Pull both levers : with both index fin-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 219 · Applies to: 450, 451

gers in the direction of the arrows. X First pull both levers ; forwards and then completely out. X Lift service cover = and pull forwards. X Hook service cover = into the openings on the vehicle using the hooks at the top rear. Inserting X Lift service cover =. X Slide bars A on the left and right of the service cover under the bars on wing ?. X Press service cover = down in the direc- tion of the arrow. X Slide both levers ; in and then back. X Press lever ; in the radiator trim and allow it to engage. Vehicles with a lockable service cover: X To lock: insert the key into the lock and turn it to position 1. Insert lock cover : flush (on the driv- er's side) and clip it into place. Checking service products 209

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Coolant

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 220 · Applies to: 450, 451

Important safety notes G WARNING The engine cooling system is under pres- sure, particularly if the engine is warm. You could be scalded by hot coolant spray- ing out when opening the cap. There is a danger of injury. Allow the engine to cool before opening the cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow pressure to escape. Checking the coolant The coolant expansion tank is in the area under the service cover. X Open the service cover (Y page 208). X Let the coolant cool down for at least 30 minutes. X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehi- cle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Check the reservoir visually. The fluid level must be between MIN and MAX. Topping up the coolant X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ; with a cloth. X Slowly turn cap : by half a turn anti- clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. X Do not exceed the maximum filling level when adding coolant. X Screw on cap : tightly. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 264). Windscreen washer system G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components in the front compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that windscreen washer concen- trate is not spilled next to the filler neck. X Open the service cover (Y page 208). X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X If available, pull the removable nozzle up as far as the stop. X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: if available, push the remova- ble nozzle down and push it inside. X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 265). 210 Checking service products

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Service

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 221 · Applies to: 450, 451

Service display Service message The service display informs you of the next service due date. Depending on the oper- ating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. Information on the type of service and ser- vice intervals (see separate Service Book- let). For further information enquire at any smart centre. i The service display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 207). Whenever a service is due, this is shown approximately 30 days or 1500 km (1000 mi) beforehand. After starting the engine, a service message appears in the instrument cluster display for a few seconds; see the following example. RInstrument cluster with monochrome display The ¯ or ° symbol flashes. If a service due date has been exceeded, a minus is shown before the information about the days or distance. RInstrument cluster with colour display Next service due in .. days together with the ¯ or ° symbol. If the ser- vice due date has been exceeded, Ser‐ vice due .. days ago. The symbol shows the type of service. ¯ stands for a minor service and ° for a major service. The service display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date in the service display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message This function is only available with an instrument cluster with colour display. X Press the a button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel. Calling up the service display X Switch the ignition on. X Depending on the equipment in the vehi- cle, you can call up the service display with the buttons on the multifunction lever or on the multifunction steering wheel. Instrument cluster with monochrome dis- play X Use the ÷ multifunction lever to select the Service menu. The service display shows when the ser- vice is due. Instrument cluster with colour display X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Messages and service menu. The service display shows when the ser- vice is due. Information about Service Resetting the service display ! Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and Service 211

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

damage to the major assemblies or the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 222 · Applies to: 450, 451

vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart centre, will reset the service inter- val display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for exam- ple: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods In these or similar operating conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. You can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart centre. Driving abroad An extensive smart service network is also available in other countries. For further information enquire at any smart centre. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an exten- ded period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel clean- ers could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/ linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents rec- ommended and approved by smart. Care of the exterior Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic con- ditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. 212 Care

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Make sure that:

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 223 · Applies to: 450, 451

Rthe side windows are fully closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0 The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by smart. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis com- ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high- pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the follow- ing: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Care 213

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Remove impurities immediately, where

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 224 · Applies to: 450, 451

possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas after- wards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. The following cannot always be completely repaired: Rscratches Rcorrosive deposits Rareas affected by corrosion Rdamage caused by inadequate care In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cleaning the panoramic roof ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic len- ses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic panes of the panorama roof. Do not use cleaning agents containing solvents X Clean the plastic panes of the panoramic roof using a wet sponge and a mild clean- ing agent, e.g. smart car shampoo, a com- mercially available glass cleaner or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis com- ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod- ucts to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake compo- nents. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an exten- ded period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel clean- ers could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/ linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the wind- screen or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive prod- ucts, solvents or cleaning agents con- taining solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under cer- tain circumstances prevent water from 214 Care

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

draining away. This can lead to corro-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 225 · Applies to: 450, 451

sion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the win- dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by smart. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the wind- screen or wiper blades. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Other- wise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind- screen. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when fold- ing back. The windscreen could be dam- aged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic len- ses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior light- ing. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. smart car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high- pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equip- ment manufacturer. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a high-pressure cleaner. Care 215

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 226 · Applies to: 450, 451

camera lens :. Cleaning the exhaust pipe Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental fac- tors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regu- larly, especially in winter and after wash- ing. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care prod- uct tested and approved by smart. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrep- arable damage to the display. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a com- mercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents contain- ing solvents can cause surfaces in the cock- pit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the air- bags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repel- lent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint- free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by smart. The surface may change colour tempora- rily. Wait until the surface is dry again. 216 Care

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 227 · Applies to: 450, 451

selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been rec- ommended and approved by smart. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. i Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and com- fort of the covers are retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: Runevenness in structure Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rsubtle colour differences These are characteristics of leather and not material faults. ! To maintain the leather's natural appearance, observe the following cleaning tips: Rclean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been recommended by smart. You can obtain these from a qualified special- ist workshop. Seat covers from other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution con- taining 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution con- taining 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chem- ical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap sol- ution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended and approved by smart. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by smart. Care 217

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 228 · Applies to: 450, 451

218 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ..........................

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 229 · Applies to: 450, 451

220 Where will I find...? ......................... 220 Flat tyres ....................................... 221 Battery (vehicle) ............................. 225 Jump-starting ................................. 228 Towing and tow-starting ................... 230 Electrical fuses .............................. 233 219

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 230 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Where will I find...? Warning triangle Removing/replacing the warning trian- gle The warning triangle is secured behind the front-passenger seat backrest with a Vel- cro fastener. X To remove: fold the driver's seat for- wards. X Remove warning triangle :. X To replace: press the side of warning triangle : with the Velcro fastener firmly in the relevant position. X Fold the driver's seat back again. Setting up the warning triangle X Fold feet = out to the side. X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper press-stud :. First-aid kit First-aid kit : is secured behind the front-passenger seat backrest with a Vel- cro fastener. X To remove: fold the driver's seat for- wards. X Remove first-aid kit :. X To replace: press the side of first-aid kit : with the Velcro fastener firmly in the relevant position. X Fold the driver's seat back again. i Check the use-by date on first-aid kit : at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. 220 Where will I find...?

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fire extinguisher

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 231 · Applies to: 450, 451

Fire extinguisher ; is located in front of

the passenger's seat.

X Pull tab : forwards.

X Remove fire extinguisher ;.

i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled

after each use and checked every one to

two years. It may otherwise fail in an

emergency.

Observe the legal requirements for each

individual country.

Vehicle tool kit

The TIREFIT kit and the towing eye are

located in the stowage well under the front-

passenger footwell.

X Unscrew wing nuts :.

X Remove the vehicle tool tray.

Towing eye ; Tyre sealant filler bottle = Tyre inflation compressor Flat tyres Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with a TIREFIT kit (Y page 221). Information on changing a wheel/fitting (Y page 248). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they get out of the vehicle. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. Flat tyres 221

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Close the driver's door.

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 232 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Place the warning triangle a suitable distance away (Y page 220). Observe legal requirements. TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem- peratures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre seal- ant is unable to provide sufficient break- down assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irri- tation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre seal- ant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vom- iting, and seek medical attention imme- diately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than 15 minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor from the front-passenger footwell (Y page 221). X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. 222 Flat tyres

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Unwind plug : with the cable from the

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 233 · Applies to: 450, 451

tyre inflation compressor ;. X Remove hose A from the bottom section of tyre inflation compressor housing ;. X Remove cap on tyre sealant bottle ? and connect hose A. X Remove the cap from valve E on the faulty tyre. X Remove cap on filler hose = and screw filler hose = onto the valve. X Insert plug : into the socket of the cig- arette lighter (Y page 203) or into the 12 V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 204). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 115). X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation compressor ; to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- pressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of 15 minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) is achieved after a maximum of 15 minutes, see "Tyre pressure is achieved" (Y page 223). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after a maximum of 15 minutes, see "Tyre pressure is not ach- ieved" (Y page 223). i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Tyre pressure not reached If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after a maximum of 10 minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the defective tyre. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of 10 minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. Flat tyres 223

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You should therefore adapt your driving

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 234 · Applies to: 450, 451

style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The 80 km/h maxi- mum speed sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after 10 minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the defective tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately 3 km and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). For the val- ues see the tyre pressure information label on the driver's side B-pillar. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pres- sure gauge ;. X If the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified special- ist workshop. 224 Flat tyres

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Battery (vehicle)

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 235 · Applies to: 450, 451

Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or installing, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeu- vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop. Further information about ABS (Y page 59) and esp® (Y page 61). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the cre- ation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing elec- trostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture is cre- ated while the battery is charging and when jump-starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Elec- trostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing Rdue to friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery pro- duces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explo- sion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- ing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batter- ies out of the reach of children. Immedi- ately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with Battery (vehicle) 225

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

plenty of clean water and seek medical

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 236 · Applies to: 450, 451

attention at once. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsi- ble recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsi- ble manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a qualified specialist work- shop or to a collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Ser- vice Booklet or contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. If, in exceptional cir- cumstances, you need to disconnect the battery yourself, please make sure that: Ryou have switched off the engine and removed the key. Check to see that there are no indicator lamps lighting in the instrument cluster. Electronic components such as the alternator may otherwise be damaged. Ryou have first removed the negative terminal and then the positive termi- nal. Never mix up the terminal clamps. The vehicle's electronics system may otherwise be damaged. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batter- ies. WARNING Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective cloth- ing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes- ted and approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the max- imum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. To maintain the charge, you can 226 Battery (vehicle)

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

also charge the battery with a charger rec-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 237 · Applies to: 450, 451

ommended by smart. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more fre- quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. i When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Charging the battery G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explo- sive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, cre- ating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- ing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batter- ies out of the reach of children. Immedi- ately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temper- atures below freezing point. When jump- starting the vehicle or charging the bat- tery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. X Open the service cover (Y page 208). X Connect the battery charger to the posi- tive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor bat- tery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 228). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low tem- peratures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only charge the fitted battery with a bat- tery charger which has been tested and approved by smart. A battery charger spe- cially adapted for smart vehicles, and tes- ted and approved by smart, is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact a smart centre for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Battery (vehicle) 227

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Jump-starting

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 238 · Applies to: 450, 451

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is suffi- cient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when con- necting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are con- nected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and dis- connecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 228 Jump-starting

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 239 · Applies to: 450, 451

discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jump leads are not damaged. RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the wiper rods or the fan. X Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the service cover. Jump-starting 229

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Position number A identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 240 · Applies to: 450, 451

jump-starting device. X Remove the protective cover from positive terminal :. X Connect positive terminal : on your battery to positive terminal ; of donor battery A using the jump lead. Begin with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery A to negative terminal ? of your battery using the jump lead. Connect the jump lead to donor battery A first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X First disconnect the jump lead from negative terminal ? and negative terminal = and then from positive terminal : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the con- tacts on your own vehicle first. X Attach the protective cover to positive terminal :. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running Rthe brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage sup- ply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehi- cle and its weight is greater than the per- missible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehi- cle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehi- cle. Information on your vehicle's gross vehi- cle weight rating can be found on the vehi- cle identification plate (Y page 259). 230 Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Observe the following points when tow-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 241 · Applies to: 450, 451

ing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not lon- ger than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always main- tain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise dam- age the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehi- cle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. Observe the legal requirements for the rel- evant countries when towing and tow-start- ing. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you cannot turn the key to posi- tion 2 in the ignition lock. i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the automatic locking feature (Y page 69). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted: Do not tow away the vehicle with the basic carrier fitted. Do not secure the tow cable or tow bar to the basic carrier. Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye X Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. The towing eye is located in the vehicle tool kit stowage compartment in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 221). X Carefully prise out cover : using a suitable tool, e.g. a plastic wedge. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop and tighten it. Towing and tow-starting 231

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Removing the towing eye

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 242 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Position top of cover : in the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit stowage compartment in the front- passenger footwell (Y page 221). Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 230). ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could oth- erwise damage the brake system. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 90). X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the key with you. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground i In order to signal a change of direction when towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Leave the key in position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 90). It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 230). Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehi- cle onto a trailer or transporter for trans- porting purposes. Tow-starting (emergency engine start- ing) i You can find information on "Jump- starting" at (Y page 228). Before tow-starting the following condi- tions must be fulfilled: Rthe battery is connected. Rthe engine has cooled down. Rthe exhaust system has cooled down. 232 Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When tow-starting, it is important that you

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 243 · Applies to: 450, 451

observe the safety instructions (Y page 230) and the legal requirements in each respective country. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 90). X Fit the towing eye (Y page 231). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage second gear and keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. X When the engine is started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away with the parking brake. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 232). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper- age, the electric cables could be overloa- ded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for smart vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system con- cerned. Components or systems could otherwise be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to discon- nect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their func- tions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart (Y page 235). If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a quali- fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- Benz Service Centre. Before replacing a fuse X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 115). All indi- cator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the front area RFuse box in the glove compartment Fuse box in the front area Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 233). G WARNING If the windscreen wipers start to move when the service cover is open, you could become caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk of injury. Electrical fuses 233

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Always switch off the windscreen wipers

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 244 · Applies to: 450, 451

and the ignition before you open the ser- vice cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could other- wise impair the operation of the fuses. X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Open the service cover (Y page 208). You can now see fuse box :. Fuse box in the glove compartment Fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dash- board or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could other- wise impair the operation of the fuses. X Open the front-passenger door. X Vehicles with lockable glove compart- ment: open the glove compartment. X To open: open cover : in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it engages. X Vehicles with lockable glove compart- ment: close the glove compartment. 234 Electrical fuses

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fuse allocation

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 245 · Applies to: 450, 451

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 1 Starter motor 5 A Brown 2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown 3 Lighting control unit 5 A Brown 4 Airbag 5 A Brown 5 ‑ ‑ ‑ 6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red 7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue 8 Control unit power supply 10 A Red 9 Control unit power supply 10 A Red 10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow 11 Turn signals 15 A Blue 12 Central control unit 10 A Red 13 Central control unit 15 A Blue 14 ‑ 30 A Green 15 esp® 5 A Brown 16 Interior lighting 10 A Red 17 Immobiliser 3 A Violet Electrical fuses 235

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Consumer

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 246 · Applies to: 450, 451

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown 19 Brake lamps 10 A Red 20 Parking aid, headlamp settings, Lane Keeping Assist 15 A Blue 21 Engine control unit 5 A Brown 22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue 23 Starter motor 30 A Green 24 Central locking 40 A Orange 25 Front windscreen wipers 30 A Green 26 Radio 20 A Yellow 27 ‑ ‑ ‑ 28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue 29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown 30 Horn 15 A Blue 31 ‑ 10 A Red 32 Central locking 15 A Blue 33 Tail lamps, hazard warning lamp button, lock- ing button, headlamp range control, power win- dows, licence plate lighting, radio, control panel for air-conditioning system, cruise con- trol, limiter, parking aid button, program selector button, tailgate unlocking, Lane Keep- ing Assist camera, automatic start/stop system button 25 A Cyan 34 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan 35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan 36 ‑ ‑ ‑ 37 ‑ ‑ ‑ 38 ‑ ‑ ‑ 39 ‑ ‑ ‑ 40 ‑ ‑ ‑ 236 Electrical fuses

Breakdown assistance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Consumer

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 247 · Applies to: 450, 451

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 41 ‑ ‑ ‑ 42 ‑ ‑ 43 Exterior mirror heating 5 A Brown 44 Anti-entrapment feature 25 A Cyan 45 Transmission control unit 5 A Brown 46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow 47 ‑ ‑ ‑ 48 ‑ ‑ ‑ 49 ‑ ‑ Electrical fuses 237

Breakdown assistance. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 248 · Applies to: 450, 451

238 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ..........................

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 249 · Applies to: 450, 451

240 Important safety notes ...................... 240 Operation ...................................... 240 Winter operation ............................. 242 Tyre pressure ................................. 243 Changing a wheel ............................. 247 Wheel and tyre combinations .............. 252 239

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 250 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension com- ponents may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the orig- inal part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype G Warning A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by smart or that are not being used correctly can impair the driving safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Information on dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle (Y page 252). Information on air pressure for the tyres on your vehicle can be found: Ron the tyre pressure information label on the driver's side B-pillar Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 243) Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not per- mitted. This invalidates the general oper- ating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving RCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust before starting your journey. RWhile driving, pay attention to vibra- tions, noises and unusual handling char- acteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling charac- teristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the 240 Operation

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

kerb or other obstacles. If it is neces-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 251 · Applies to: 450, 451

sary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. Regular checking of wheels and tyres G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam- age and replace any damaged tyres imme- diately. Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage, at least once a month, as well as after driving on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres Rpunctures in the tyres Rtears in the tyres Rbulges on tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 241). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by smart. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 243). The service life of tyres depends on vari- ous factors, including the following: Rdriving style Rtyre pressure Rmileage Notes on tyre profile G WARNING Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dis- sipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increa- ses, in particular where speed is not adap- ted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm RM+S tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the mini- mum tyre tread depth is reached. Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre burst- ing. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Operation 241

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Pay special attention to the country-spe-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 252 · Applies to: 450, 451

cific requirements for tyre approval. These requirements can stipulate a spe- cific tyre type for your vehicle. Further- more, the use of certain tyre types in cer- tain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any smart centre. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tyre. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise sig- nificantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 247). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres perma- nently. smart cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam- age and replace any damaged tyres imme- diately. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 † use winter tyres marked with M+S. Only winter tyres bearing the i snow- flake symbol in addition to the M+S mark- ing provide the best possible grip in win- try road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifi- cally for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling char- acteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for smart. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for smart. Tyres with a specified direction of rota- tion have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tyres are fitted 242 Winter operation

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

corresponding to the direction of rota-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 253 · Applies to: 450, 451

tion. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indi- cates its correct direction of rotation. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower max- imum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop. Under these circumstances, you should also use the speed limiter to restrict the max- imum speed of the vehicle so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 141). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 243). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (vehi- cles with black and white display) (Y page 246). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (vehi- cles with colour display) (Y page 246). Snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for smart. For more information, please contact the smart centre or a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 252). Ronly use snow chains when the road sur- face is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-cov- ered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Tyre pressure 243

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 254 · Applies to: 450, 451

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloa- ded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pressure monitoring systems will cause the tyre valve to remain open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by smart for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. You will find a table with the recommended tyre pressure on the tyre pressure infor- mation label on the driver's side B-pillar. The tyre pressure information label may also state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure information label apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclu- sion about the tyre pressure. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 2 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed at which you are driving and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure change by approximately: 10 kPa per 10 † (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres Rcause increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling char- acteristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) 244 Tyre pressure

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tyre pressure monitor

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 255 · Applies to: 450, 451

General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only func- tions if the corresponding sensors are fit- ted to all wheels. Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situa- tion (Y page 243). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situa- tion must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the ref- erence values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure. The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops sig- nificantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 243). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure mon- itor is indicated: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunc- tioning. i On-board computer with colour dis- play: In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the display. Observe the information on display mes- sages (Y page 178). If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunc- tioning, it may take up to ten minutes for the tyre pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction. The malfunction will be indicated first by the tyre pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pres- sure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. cordless headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Tyre pressure monitor warning (on- board computer with monochrome dis- play) If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pres- sure loss in one or more tyres, the yellow warning light in the tyre pressure monitor lights up. If the tyre pressure in one or more tyres suddenly sinks, a warning tone also sounds. Tyre pressure 245

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Observe the instructions and safety notes

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 256 · Applies to: 450, 451

for the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster in the "Tyres" section (Y page 192). Tyre pressure monitor warning messages (on-board computer with colour display) If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pres- sure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the display. The yellow warning light in the tyre pressure monitor lights up. For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds. RIf the Correct tyre pressure message appears in the display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low. Correct the tyre pressure at the next opportunity. RIf the Tyre pressure Caution tyre malfunction message appears in the display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly and the tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes for the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 178) and the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster in the "Tyres" section (Y page 192). Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will auto- matically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also define reference val- ues manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. X Using the tyre pressure information label on the driver's side B-pillar, ensure that the tyre pressure of all four wheels is correctly set for the operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 243). On-board computer with a monochrome dis- play X To restart the tyre pressure monitor: press the ´ button on the multifunc- tion lever repeatedly until the ° h symbols are displayed. X Press and hold the a button on the multifunction lever. The ° h symbols flash for about 5 seconds. The symbols then both remain lit. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted. On-board computer with a colour display X To restart the tyre pressure monitor: press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu and press a on the steering wheel to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Tyre pressure monitor submenu and confirm with a. The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt current pressures as new reference values? message appears in the display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the 9 or : button to select yes and press the a button to confirm. The Tyre pressure monitor restarted message appears in the display. X Press a to confirm. After a short while, the message is also hidden without pressing the a but- ton. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and moni- tored. 246 Tyre pressure

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i If the Tyre pressure monitor

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 257 · Applies to: 450, 451

restarted message does not appear after approximately 5 seconds, the restart was not successful. If this occurs, repeat the restart. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the 9 or : button to select no and press the a button to confirm. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be moni- tored. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number Argen- tina MW2433A H-12337 GG4 H-12338 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Abu Dhabi Dubai TRA, Registered-NO ER0092100/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Country Radio type approval number Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 MHz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philip- pines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 Singa- pore Compliance with IDA Stand- ard DA- 103365 South Africa TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Changing a wheel Flat tyres You can find information on what to do in the event of flat tyre in the "Flat tyre" sec- tion (Y page 221). Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Never interchange the front and rear wheels as they have different dimensions, e.g. size, offset etc. Otherwise, there could be a Changing a wheel 247

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

negative effect on the road holding and you

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 258 · Applies to: 450, 451

could endanger yourself or others. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Various types of steel wheel can be fitted on your vehicle. Some steel wheels have a red mark in the hub cap area. The hub cap has to be removed to see the red mark, see "Raising the vehicle" in the "Wheel change" section (Y page 249). When chang- ing the wheels, always fit wheels of the same type on all axles. Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the gen- eral operating permit invalid. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel (Y page 247). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and reactivate the tyre pressure monitor if necessary. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rota- tion have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the direction of rota- tion is observed during fitting. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indi- cates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably dark place if they are not being used. Pro- tect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle X Make sure that you have the appropriate tyre-changing tools. For further infor- mation enquire at any smart centre. i Necessary tyre-changing tools can include, for example: Rjack Rwheel chock Rwheel wrench X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake (Y page 133). X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. X Depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Also secure the vehicle against rolling away. Securing the vehicle against rolling away 248 Changing a wheel

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X On level ground: place chocks or other

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 259 · Applies to: 450, 451

suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehi- cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: Rmake sure you have a suitable jack and wheel wrench. If the jack is used incor- rectly, it could tip over while the vehi- cle is raised. For further information enquire at any smart centre. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the park- ing brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non- slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the tailgate while the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Steel wheel with wheel trim X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: carefully reach into two of the hub cap openings and remove the hub cap. Changing a wheel 249

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Steel wheel with hub cap

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 260 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: remove the hub cap. X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The vehicle may only be raised at the des- ignated jacking points on the sill. The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). You can identify the jacking points by the trian- gular indentations on the sill. To avoid damage, position the jack cen- trally under the triangular indentations. X Position jack ; centrally under the tri- angular indentations at jacking points on the sill :. Example X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. X Raise the vehicle with jack ; until the tyre is at most 3 cm off the ground. Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. 250 Changing a wheel

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fitting a new wheel

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 261 · Applies to: 450, 451

G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a quali- fied specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driv- ing. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 247). Only use wheel bolts that are designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- sons, smart recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for smart vehicles and the respective wheel. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. X Lower the vehicle until it is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indi- cated (: to ?). The tightening torque must be 105 Nm. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 243). i Vehicles with tyre pressure control system: all fitted wheels must be equip- ped with functioning sensors. Changing a wheel 251

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Steel wheel with wheel trim

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 262 · Applies to: 450, 451

X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: fit hub cap A so that tyre valve B is not trapped. X Press the hub cap A evenly onto the wheel with both hands. X Check to make sure the hub cap A is seated safely on the wheel. X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: fit the hub cap. Wheel and tyre combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been specifically approved by smart for your vehicle. These are spe- cially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®. Only use tyres and wheels specifically tested and approved by smart. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, dimensional variations and different tyre deformation characteristics could cause the tyres to make contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. smart accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres or wheels other than those tested and approved. Information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a smart centre. ! Retreaded tyres have not been tested by smart and the fitment of such tyres is not recommended. Previous damage sus- tained by the tyres (before the retread- ing process) cannot always be recog- nised. As a result, smart cannot guaran- tee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfa- ces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. Overview of abbreviations used in the fol- lowing tyre tables: RBA: both axles RFA: front axle RRA: rear axle You will find a table with the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure infor- mation label on the driver's side B-pillar. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 243). Check tyre pressures reg- ularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres on all wheels at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres) Exception: it is permissible to fit a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tyre. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fitted at the factory in all countries. 252 Wheel and tyre combinations

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Tyres

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 263 · Applies to: 450, 451

smart fortwo coupé 45 kW Summer tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 T Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 FA: 165/65 R15 81 H5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 H Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 R 16 Tyres Wheels FA: 185/50 R16 81 H5 RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44 RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40 Winter tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section “Snow chains”. Wheel and tyre combinations 253

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

smart fortwo coupé 52 kW

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 264 · Applies to: 450, 451

Summer tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 T Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 FA: 165/65 R15 81 H5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 H Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 R 16 Tyres Wheels FA: 185/50 R16 81 H5 RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44 RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40 Winter tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section “Snow chains”. 254 Wheel and tyre combinations

Wheels and tyres. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

smart fortwo coupé 66 kW Turbo

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 265 · Applies to: 450, 451

Summer tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 T Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 FA: 165/65 R15 81 H5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 H Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 R 16 Tyres Wheels FA: 185/50 R16 81 H5 RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44 RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40 Winter tyres R 15 Tyres Wheels FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si5 RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si Steel wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42 Light-alloy wheels: FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32 RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42 5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section “Snow chains”. Wheel and tyre combinations 255

Wheels and tyres. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 266 · Applies to: 450, 451

256 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information ..........................

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 267 · Applies to: 450, 451

258 Information on technical data ............ 258 Vehicle electronics ......................... 258 Identification plates ....................... 259 Service products and capacities ......... 260 Vehicle data ................................... 265 257

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 268 · Applies to: 450, 451

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all fea- tures described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified spe- cialist workshops: (Y page 21). Information on technical data General notes You can find current technical data on the Internet on our smart homepage. i The technical data was determined in accordance with EC Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equip- ment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. For further information enquire at any smart centre. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist work- shop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radia- tion could interfere with the vehicle elec- tronics, e.g.: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them to the low- reflection exterior aerial. ! The operating permit may be invalida- ted if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Robserve the maximum permissible out- put in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. 258 Vehicle electronics

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radi-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 269 · Applies to: 450, 451

ation may cause damage to your health and

to the health of others. The use of an exte-

rior aerial takes into consideration the

scientific discussion surrounding the

possible health risk posed by electromag-

netic fields.

The following aerial positions may be used

if RF transmitters have been properly

installed:

Approved aerial positions

Front roof area ; Rear roof area Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fit- ting aftermarket radio frequency trans- mitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes- Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Tetra 380 - 410 MHz 20 W Mobile communica- tions generation 2G/3G/4G 6 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum trans- mission output of up to 100 mW RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTetra RMobile communications (2G/3G/4G) Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) X Open the front-passenger door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Identification plates 259

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Example: vehicle identification plate

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 270 · Applies to: 450, 451

Vehicle identification plate ; Paint code = Vehicle manufacturer ? EU type approval number A Vehicle identification number (VIN) B Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight C Maximum permissible front axle load D Maximum permissible rear axle load i The data shown on the vehicle identi- fication plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold up floor covering : in front of the right-hand front seat. You will see VIN ;. The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 259). Engine number The engine number is stamped onto the crankcase. You can obtain further infor- mation from any qualified specialist workshop. Service products and capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed orig- inal container. Always keep service prod- ucts out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally-responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmis- sion oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindscreen washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. smart recommends that you use products tested and approved by smart. 260 Service products and capacities

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

They are listed in this smart Owner's Man-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 271 · Applies to: 450, 451

ual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specifica- tion in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. i For further information enquire at any smart centre. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into con- tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thoroughly with clean water immedi- ately. Seek immediate medical atten- tion. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomit- ing. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Tank capacity Model Total capa- city All models 28.0 l or 34.0 l Model Of which reserve fuel All models Approx. 5.0 l Petrol Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com- pletely. ! Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/ 85 MOZ, that conforms to European stand- ard EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equiv- alent specification. Fuel of this specification can contain up to 10 % ethanol. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear and damage the engine and exhaust sys- tem. Service products and capacities 261

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Only use the fuel recommended. Oper-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 272 · Applies to: 450, 451

ating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) Rpetrol with additives containing metal RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel rec- ommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. Engine failure may otherwise occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with cleaning additives recom- mended by smart, see "Additives". For further information enquire at any smart centre. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. As a temporary measure, if the recommen- ded fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consump- tion. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON/MON. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 130). Additives ! Operation of the engine with fuel addi- tives added later can cause engine dam- age. Therefore, do not mix any fuel addi- tives with the fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by smart. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. For further information on recommended additives enquire at any smart centre. smart recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a smart centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by smart. You must observe the notes and mix- ing ratios specified on the container. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci- entists believe to be principally respon- sible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road condi- tions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis- sions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. 262 Service products and capacities

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 273 · Applies to: 450, 451

the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures Rin urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC docu- ments (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were in each case based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. Engine oil General notes When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 260). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes- Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. There- fore, only use engine oils approved by Mercedes-Benz. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any smart centre. smart recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designa- tion, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter- ing the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines: in certain countries, dif- ferent engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Model MB Approval All models 229.5 i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the fol- lowing engine oils until the next oil change: RMB Approval 229.1 and 229.3 or ACEA A3 This must only be added once and the amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model Replacement amount All models 3.4 l Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Service products and capacities 263

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Engine oil viscosity

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 274 · Applies to: 450, 451

Viscosity describes the flow characteris- tics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low- temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during opera- tion due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Brake fluid When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 260). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified special- ist workshop or on the Internet at: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Ser- vice Booklet. Coolant General notes ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifica- tions for Service Products, MB Specifi- cations for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high tempera- tures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corro- sion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Comply with the important safety precau- tions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 260). The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is pres- ent in the correct concentration, the boil- ing point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. 264 Service products and capacities

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 275 · Applies to: 450, 451

centration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. smart recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corro- sion protection. i The coolant is checked at every main- tenance interval at a qualified special- ist workshop. Windscreen washer system General notes ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Oth- erwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 260). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. The correct mixing ratio can be taken from the information on the antifreeze protection container. i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maxi- mum payload. Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identifica- tion plate (Y page 259). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CON- FORMITY). These documents are deliv- ered with your vehicle. You can find the correct values for your model with the help of the VIN on the vehi- cle identification plate (Y page 259). Vehicle data 265

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dimensions and weights

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 276 · Applies to: 450, 451

Model : Opening height All models 1855 mm All models Vehicle length 2695 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1893 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1663 mm Vehicle height 1555 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum boot load 75 kg Maximum tailgate load 100 kg 266 Vehicle data

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 277 · Applies to: 450, 451

267 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 278 · Applies to: 450, 451

268 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Publication details

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 279 · Applies to: 450, 451

Internet Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.smart.com http://www.daimler.com Editorial office You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documen- tation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, transla- ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 05.09.2014 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

É4535847902ÄËÍ

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 280 · Applies to: 450, 451

4535847902 Order no. 6522 0126 02 Part no. 453 584 79 02 Edition NA 2014-11d www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Other ManualsLib Projects

Fortwo_450-451_Owner_Manual_272p.pdf · p. 281 · Applies to: 450, 451

www.manualslib.com www.manualslib.de www.manualslib.es www.manualslib.fr www.manualslib.nl www.manualslib.mx www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages